User Manual: SRT 1F Synchronous Radio For Trunk Applications UMN

User Manual
SRT 1F
Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications

UMN

911-362/02C0000

Issue 2, January 2003

UMN SRT 1F
SRT 1F
ii 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Siemens Mobile Communications S.p.A. 2003
V.le Piero e Alberto Pirelli, 10
I-20126 Milano

Issued by Customer Documentation Department
S.S. 11 Padana Superiore, km 158
I-20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI

Copyright (C) Fujitsu/Siemens 2003
Technical modifications possible without notice to customers.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.

UMN Table of Contents
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 i
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................1-1
1.1 General description.................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment..........................................1-1
1.1.2 Equipment Features ...............................................................................1-1
1.2 SRT 1F Equipment Details .....................................................................1-6
1.2.1 Ordering Guide .......................................................................................1-6
1.2.2 BRU (Branching Network Unit) ...............................................................1-8
1.2.3 MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) ..................................................1-8
1.2.4 SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit) ....................................1-8
1.2.5 BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit)..............................................................1-9
1.2.6 General Specifications..........................................................................1-10
1.2.7 General Information..............................................................................1-10
1.2.8 Transmitter (TX) ...................................................................................1-11
1.2.9 Receiver (RX) .......................................................................................1-15
1.2.10 Modulator (MOD) ..................................................................................1-16
1.2.11 Demodulator (DEM) ..............................................................................1-16
1.2.12 Digital Processing.................................................................................1-17
1.2.13 Overall ..................................................................................................1-19
1.2.14 RF Interference.....................................................................................1-25
1.2.15 Countermeasures to Fading .................................................................1-26
1.2.16 Signal Interface for STM-1 System.......................................................1-27
1.2.16.1 Base Band Signal Interface ..................................................................1-27
1.2.16.2 Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface ................................................1-27
1.2.16.3 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface .............................................1-28
1.2.16.4 Jitter......................................................................................................1-28
1.2.16.5 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) ................................................................1-28
1.2.16.6 BSI........................................................................................................1-29
1.2.17 Auxiliary Signal Interface ......................................................................1-29
1.2.17.1 Radio User Channel (RUC)...................................................................1-29
1.2.17.2 Way Side (WS) .....................................................................................1-29
1.2.17.3 Order Wire (OW) ..................................................................................1-30
1.2.17.4 User Channel (UC) ...............................................................................1-30
1.3 Mechanical Specification.......................................................................1-31
1.3.1 General .................................................................................................1-31
1.3.2 Rack construction .................................................................................1-32
1.3.3 Inter-Rack Connections ........................................................................1-32
1.3.4 Rack Layout..........................................................................................1-33
Table of Contents UMN
SRT 1F
ii 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.3.5 Unit Layout............................................................................................1-35
1.4 Environmental Specification..................................................................1-37
1.5 Power Requirements ............................................................................1-38
1.5.1 General .................................................................................................1-38
1.5.2 Unit Power Consumption ......................................................................1-38
1.6 Frequency Plan and Antenna System...................................................1-39
1.6.1 General Information..............................................................................1-39
1.6.2 Frequency Plan.....................................................................................1-39
1.6.2.1 U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)............................1-44
1.6.2.2 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3) .............................1-45
1.6.2.3 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1) .................1-46
1.6.2.4 L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5) ...........................1-47
1.6.2.5 U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)...........................1-48
1.6.2.7 U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)...........................1-50
1.6.2.9 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) ...........................1-52
1.6.2.10 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6 Annex-2) .............1-54
1.6.3 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4) ............................1-56
1.6.4 RF Branching Network..........................................................................1-57
2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION....................................................................................2-1
2.1 Equipment Configurations and Features.................................................2-1
2.1.1 SRT 1F System ......................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Terminal..................................................................................................2-1
2.1.3 Baseband Interface.................................................................................2-4
2.1.4 Alternated and Co-channel Operation.....................................................2-4
2.2 STM-1 Signal Transmission....................................................................2-8
2.2.1 STM-1 Electrical Signal Interface............................................................2-8
2.2.2 Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function).........................................................2-8
2.2.3 Space Diversity.....................................................................................2-12
2.2.4 MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................2-13
2.2.4.1 Top View of MSTU Adapter ..................................................................2-15
2.2.5 Engineering Orderwire (OW) ................................................................2-16
2.2.6 User Channel (UC) ...............................................................................2-17
2.2.7 Radio User Channel (RUC)...................................................................2-18
2.2.8 Wayside Traffic (WS)............................................................................2-19
2.2.9 Digital Communication Channel (DCC) .................................................2-20
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 iii
2.3 OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System.............................................2-21
2.3.1 MSOH and RSOH.................................................................................2-22
2.3.2 RFCOH.................................................................................................2-24
2.4 Radio Protection Switch System...........................................................2-28
2.4.1 Outline of Radio Protection Switching...................................................2-28
2.4.2 USW and BSW.....................................................................................2-30
2.4.3 Switching Priority ..................................................................................2-32
2.4.4 Switching Initiator and Operation Time .................................................2-33
2.4.5 Occasional Traffic (option) ....................................................................2-34
2.5 Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU)......................................2-35
2.5.1 Signal Interface.....................................................................................2-37
2.5.2 Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit.....................................................................2-37
2.5.3 Supervisory (SV) unit ............................................................................2-37
2.5.4 Timing Control Unit (TCU) ....................................................................2-42
2.5.5 Housekeeping (HK) unit........................................................................2-42
2.5.6 Embedded Communication Unit (ECU) (option)...................................2-43
2.5.7 Occasional Interface (OCC INTF) unit (option) ....................................2-43
2.5.8 Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit (option) ..........................2-44
2.6 Baseband Interface Unit (BBIU)............................................................2-44
2.6.1 Optical Interface (OPT INTF) unit .........................................................2-44
2.6.2 MSP SW and BBC................................................................................2-48
2.7 Applications ..........................................................................................2-51
2.7.1 Co-Channel Operation..........................................................................2-51
2.7.2 Synchronization ....................................................................................2-53
2.7.2.1 Synchronization Source ........................................................................2-53
2.7.2.2 Synchronization Mode...........................................................................2-54
2.7.2.3 Clock Mode...........................................................................................2-56
2.7.2.4 Quality Level (S1 byte)..........................................................................2-56
2.7.2.5 Line Clock Priority.................................................................................2-57
2.7.3 Orderwire Applications..........................................................................2-58
2.7.3.1 Orderwire Extension .............................................................................2-58
2.7.3.2 Digital-Through .....................................................................................2-58
2.7.3.3 Ring Protection .....................................................................................2-58
3 INSTALLATION........................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Installation preliminaries .........................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Storage, Unpacking and Inspection ........................................................3-1
3.1.1.1 Storage...................................................................................................3-1
SRT 1F
iv 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.1.1.2 Preparation.............................................................................................3-2
3.1.1.3 Unpacking and Inspection.......................................................................3-2
3.1.1.4 General Unpacking Method ....................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Storage of Spare Units ...........................................................................3-2
3.1.3 Accessories ............................................................................................3-3
3.2 Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers..........................................................3-3
3.2.1 Warning and General Handling...............................................................3-3
3.2.1.1 Tools Required .......................................................................................3-3
3.2.1.2 Warning Messages.................................................................................3-3
3.2.1.3 Storage...................................................................................................3-4
3.2.1.4 Handling .................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2 Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables....................................3-6
3.2.2.1 Tools Required .......................................................................................3-6
3.2.2.2 Preparation.............................................................................................3-6
3.2.2.3 Connection Procedure ............................................................................3-6
3.2.2.4 Disconnection Procedure........................................................................3-6
3.2.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors............................................3-6
3.2.3.1 Tools Required .......................................................................................3-6
3.2.3.2 Procedure...............................................................................................3-7
3.2.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors .........................................3-7
3.2.4.1 Connector End-face Definitions ..............................................................3-7
3.2.4.2 End-face Zone Definitions.......................................................................3-7
3.2.4.3 Defect Definitions....................................................................................3-8
3.2.4.4 Scratch and Pit Defects ..........................................................................3-8
3.2.4.5 Chip Defects ...........................................................................................3-9
3.2.4.6 Crack Defects .......................................................................................3-10
3.2.4.7 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-11
3.2.4.8 Procedure.............................................................................................3-11
3.3 Rack Installation ...................................................................................3-11
3.3.1 Precautions...........................................................................................3-11
3.3.1.1 Suitable Places for Equipment Installation............................................3-11
3.3.2 Safety Measures for Equipment Handling. ............................................3-12
3.3.3 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-12
3.3.4 Preparation...........................................................................................3-12
3.3.4.1 Bay Mounting........................................................................................3-13
3.3.4.2 Bay Securing ........................................................................................3-13
3.3.5 Rack Configuration ...............................................................................3-14
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 v
3.3.6 Shelf Configuration ...............................................................................3-16
3.3.7 How to Install Shelves & Units ..............................................................3-18
3.3.7.1 Preparation of Shelves..........................................................................3-18
3.3.8 Mounting of Shelves .............................................................................3-20
3.3.8.1 Mounting of Slide-In Units.....................................................................3-22
3.4 Inter Shelf Connections.........................................................................3-26
3.4.1 SRT 1F Input ........................................................................................3-26
3.4.1.1 Warning Messages...............................................................................3-26
3.4.2 Waveguide Connection.........................................................................3-27
3.4.2.1 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-28
3.4.2.2 Preparation...........................................................................................3-29
3.4.2.3 Precautions...........................................................................................3-29
3.4.3 Connection of Primary Power Lead.......................................................3-29
3.4.3.1 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-29
3.4.3.2 Procedure.............................................................................................3-32
3.4.3.3 Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment ........................................................3-33
3.4.3.4 Precautions...........................................................................................3-33
3.4.4 AMP hand Crimping Tool ......................................................................3-34
3.4.4.1 CRIMPING PROCEDURES..................................................................3-36
3.4.4.2 Assembling of AMP Connector .............................................................3-37
3.4.4.3 Office Power Supply Check ..................................................................3-37
3.4.4.4 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-37
3.4.4.5 Procedure.............................................................................................3-37
3.4.5 Frame Grounding..................................................................................3-38
3.4.6 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms .................................................3-39
3.4.7 Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors ............................................................3-39
3.4.8 Inter shelf Connection for RPS, SV, and DCC......................................3-41
3.4.9 Baseband Signal Cable Connection......................................................3-42
3.4.9.1 STM-1 electrical signal Interface...........................................................3-42
3.4.9.2 STM-1 optical signal Interface...............................................................3-43
3.4.10 Wayside Signal Cable Connection........................................................3-45
3.4.11 Inter shelf connection for CO-channel operation...................................3-46
3.5 Connector and Connector Pin Assignment ...........................................3-48
3.5.1 Connectors Layout on Back Wired Board (BWB)..................................3-48
3.5.1.1 Connectors on the BWB of SCSU ........................................................3-50
3.5.1.2 Connectors on the BWB of BBIU..........................................................3-51
3.5.2 Connector PIN assignment for OSSI ....................................................3-52
SRT 1F
vi 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.5.3 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1 ............................3-53
3.5.8 Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel .............................3-58
3.5.9 Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS ..................................3-59
3.5.10 Connector PIN assignment for EOW....................................................3-60
3.5.11 Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC.................................................3-61
3.5.12 Connector PIN assignment for User Channel .......................................3-62
3.5.13 Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock ................................3-63
4 ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP................................................................................4-1
4.1 ACCEPTANCE OF THE SRT 1F............................................................4-1
4.1.1 Perform Overall Visual Inspection...........................................................4-1
4.1.2 Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack .....................................4-2
4.1.2.1 Test Equipment Required .......................................................................4-2
4.1.2.2 Procedure...............................................................................................4-2
4.2 Installation of the SRT 1F Slide-in Units..................................................4-3
4.2.1 Warning Messages.................................................................................4-3
4.2.1.1 Laser Warning ........................................................................................4-3
4.2.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge Warning.............................................................4-3
4.2.2 Slide-In Installation Procedures ..............................................................4-5
4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units ..................................................4-5
4.2.3.1 Inserting a Slide-In Unit...........................................................................4-6
4.2.3.2 Removing a Slide-In Unit ........................................................................4-7
4.2.3.3 Removing an Optical Unit .......................................................................4-8
4.2.4 Installing the MSTU Unit .........................................................................4-9
4.2.5 Installing SCSU Unit ...............................................................................4-9
4.2.6 Installing BBIU Unit ................................................................................4-9
4.2.7 Installing the Optical Interface (OPT INTF) Unit......................................4-9
4.2.7.1 Procedure...............................................................................................4-9
4.3 SRT 1F Acceptance and Turn-Up Tests ...............................................4-10
4.3.1 Warning Messages...............................................................................4-10
4.3.1.1 Laser Warning ......................................................................................4-10
4.3.1.2 Inserting Plugin Units..........................................................................4-10
4.3.1.3 Electrostatic Discharge Warning...........................................................4-11
4.3.2 SRT 1F In-Station, Inter-Station and End to End Tests.........................4-12
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 vii
4.3.3 Test Equipment Required .....................................................................4-13
4.4 Waveguide and Antenna Alignment Tests ............................................4-14
4.4.1 Waveguide Sweeping ...........................................................................4-14
4.4.1.1 Procedure for Return Loss Measurement .............................................4-14
4.4.2 Antenna Alignment ...............................................................................4-16
4.4.2.1 AGC Current Monitoring .......................................................................4-16
4.4.2.2 Antenna XPIC Optimization ..................................................................4-17
4.4.3 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms .................................................4-17
4.5 SRT 1F In-Station Performance Tests..................................................4-18
4.5.1 Hardware Settings ................................................................................4-18
4.5.1.1 Default Values ......................................................................................4-18
4.5.2 Provisioning (Software Settings) ...........................................................4-18
4.5.2.1 Default Values ......................................................................................4-18
4.5.3 Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency....................................................4-19
4.5.3.1 Equipment Required.............................................................................4-19
4.5.3.2 Specification .........................................................................................4-19
4.5.3.3 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-20
4.5.4 Transmit Output Power Level................................................................4-21
4.5.4.2 Specification .........................................................................................4-21
4.5.4.3 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-21
4.5.5 Transmit Spectrum ...............................................................................4-23
4.5.5.2 Specification .........................................................................................4-23
4.5.5.3 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-24
4.5.6 Receiver (RX) AGC Range...................................................................4-25
4.5.6.2 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-25
4.5.7 Optical Output Power Level ..................................................................4-27
4.5.7.2 Specification .........................................................................................4-27
4.5.7.3 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-27
4.5.8 Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level .....................................4-29
4.5.8.1 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-29
4.5.9 External Clock Supply...........................................................................4-31
4.5.9.1 Warning Messages...............................................................................4-31
4.5.9.2 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-31
SRT 1F
viii 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.5.10 Rack Alarm Test ...................................................................................4-33
4.5.10.2 Test procedure......................................................................................4-33
4.5.10.3 Interface Specification ..........................................................................4-33
4.6 SRT 1F Inter-Station Tests ...................................................................4-35
4.6.1 Receive (RX) Signal Level ....................................................................4-35
4.6.1.2 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-35
4.6.2 IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE...............................................................4-36
4.6.3 SPACE DIVERSITY EQUALIZATION...................................................4-40
4.6.4 ATPC Test (End to End LAB Test)........................................................4-45
4.6.4.2 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-45
4.7 SRT 1F End to End Station Performance Tests....................................4-47
4.7.1 Remote NE Management via DCC .......................................................4-47
4.7.1.1 DCC configuration ................................................................................4-47
4.7.1.2 Test ......................................................................................................4-49
4.7.2 Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test .....................................................4-51
4.7.2.2 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-51
4.7.3 Way Side Test ......................................................................................4-53
4.7.3.2 Way Side Transmission Test ................................................................4-53
4.7.4 BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test).....................................................4-55
4.7.4.2 Specification .........................................................................................4-55
4.7.5 BACKGROUND BER TEST..................................................................4-58
4.7.6 Synchronization ....................................................................................4-60
4.7.6.1 Clock Sources selection........................................................................4-60
4.7.6.2 Test ......................................................................................................4-62
4.7.7 MSP Switching Test..............................................................................4-63
4.7.7.1 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-63
4.8 Appendix...............................................................................................4-65
4.8.1 MSTU Setting .......................................................................................4-65
4.8.1.1 MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................4-66
4.8.1.2 DADE setting for SD.............................................................................4-69
4.8.2 Hardware Setting..................................................................................4-71
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 ix
4.8.2.1 SV unit ..................................................................................................4-72
4.8.2.2 TCU unit ...............................................................................................4-73
4.8.2.3 BSW unit ..............................................................................................4-74
4.8.2.4 OCC INTF unit ......................................................................................4-75
4.8.2.5 PE INTF unit .........................................................................................4-76
4.8.3 Provisioning through LCT .....................................................................4-77
5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................5-1
5.1 LED Indications.......................................................................................5-1
5.2 LCT.........................................................................................................5-5
5.2.1 Start-up LCT Operation...........................................................................5-6
5.2.2 Alarm (Condition) Type and Description ...............................................5-11
5.2.3 Performance Monitor ............................................................................5-19
5.2.4 Analog Monitor......................................................................................5-22
5.2.5 Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI) ...............................................5-24
5.3 Radio Protection Switch........................................................................5-25
5.3.1 Automatic Switching and Status Indication............................................5-27
5.3.2 Manual Control .....................................................................................5-27
5.3.3 SW PM Data.........................................................................................5-28
5.3.4 Auto Refresh.........................................................................................5-28
5.3.5 Notice for RPS Operation .....................................................................5-29
5.3.5.1 Power off of SCSU................................................................................5-29
5.3.5.2 Lockout .................................................................................................5-29
5.3.5.3 Power off of MSTU ...............................................................................5-29
5.4 Maintenance Control of Other Functions...............................................5-30
5.4.1 Loop Back.............................................................................................5-30
5.4.2 Protection Switch Operation (MSP).......................................................5-32
5.4.2.1 Multiplex Section Protection..................................................................5-32
5.4.2.2 TCU unit Protection ..............................................................................5-32
5.4.2.3 Synch Switch ........................................................................................5-32
5.4.3 ALS Release.........................................................................................5-33
5.5 Unit Replacement .................................................................................5-34
5.5.1 Fan Replacement .................................................................................5-34
5.5.2 MSTU and Other Units..........................................................................5-36
5.5.3 SV unit Replacement ............................................................................5-37
5.5.4 Returning Replaced Unit .......................................................................5-40
5.6 APPENDIX............................................................................................5-42
5.6.1 LCT Command Tree and Functions......................................................5-42
SRT 1F
x 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
A APPENDIX................................................................................................................... 1
A.1 Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms................................................................... 1

UMN 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-1
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 General description
1.1.1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment
The SRT 1F series radio equipment is a high capacity (155 Mbit/s STM-
1) system designed for trunk line transmission applications.
The SRT 1F series operate in the 4/5/U6/11 GHz radio frequency bands
with 40 MHz frequency spacing, and in the U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz radio
frequency bands with 28.00, 29.00 and 29.65 MHz frequency spacing.
The equipment is fully solid state and is designed to meet ITU-T and
ITU-R Recommendations for long haul and high capacity digital
microwave radio systems. The modulation scheme used is 64/128 QAM
Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) with forward error correction.
The SRT 1F can be used in various types of SDH networks such as
ring, media diversity or linear configurations, and over various
communication routes , i.e., waterways, mountains, inter or intra-city
routes.
The SRT 1F accepts one synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1) signal per RF
frequency for alternated operation, or two synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-
1) signals per RF frequency for co-channel operation.
The protection scheme is N+1 for alternated operation and (N+1)2 for
co-channel operation.
Various optional functions are provided, such as 2 Mb/s wayside traffic
(carried by RFCOH and SOH respectively) and digital service channels
(carried by RFCOH). Each RF channel can carry two wayside signals
plus two digital service channels, and all protected by the N+1 Radio
Protection System (RPS).
1.1.2 Equipment Features
The main features of the SRT 1F series radio equipment are;
Completely solid-state
Fully SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) compatible digital radio.
Interconnectabilityy with other manufacturers SDH transmission
equipment available. (Further study might be necessary for
undefined overhead bytes,etc.)
SDH STM-1 optical interface available as an option.
1+1 protected STM-1 optical interface for Multiplex Section
Protection (MSP).
Section overhead (SOH) bits insertion/extraction at both terminal
and repeater stations, the same as for SDH optical fiber
transmission systems.
High power amplifier using GaAs Field Effect Transistor (GaAs FET)
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION UMN
SRT 1F
1-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Low power consumption of the RF High Power Amplifier using IF
pre-distortion linearity compensation.
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is available as standard
configuration.
Low noise amplifier using High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT)
with a noise figure of 1.5 dB (typical) for 4-6 GHz band.
High spectral efficiency of 8.5 bits/sec/Hz using 64 QAM Multi-Level
Coded Modulation (64 QAM MLCM) and 11.4 bits/sec/Hz using 128
QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (128 QAM MLCM) for co-
channel operation.
High efficiency error correction using Multi-Level Coded Modulation
(MLCM).
Super high density packaging:
Eight (8) complete SDH radio system including Synchronous
Equipment Management Function (SEMF) are mounted in one ETSI
rack (2200600300 mm).
Space diversity reception is available as a standard function (by
software-based). In-Phase (IP) combiner is used.
Adaptive demodulator with fully digital linear transversal equalizer
(TVE) with decision feedback equalizer (DFE).
Errorless protection switching with early warning detection on fading.
Radio user channel (RUC) for a maximum of 2 channels using
RFCOH.
Signal interfaces are available for both VF and 64 kb/s signal.
64 kb/s signal interface complies with ITU-T recommendation G.703
for co-directional or contra-directional interface.
One user channel using F1 byte of SOH per STM-1 is also available.
Two 2 Mb/s wayside traffic channels using SOH and RFCOH are
available.
Event management facility:
Alarms and status of the equipment is reported by the SEMF
(Synchronous Equipment Management Function) using the Data
Communication Channel (DCC)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-3
Performance management facility:
Traffic performance of each hop and of each end-to-end can be
monitored on each RF channel.
Monitoring items are BBE (Background Block Error), BBER
(Background Block Error Ratio), ES(Errored Seconds), ESR(Errored
Second Ratio), SES (Severely Error Seconds), SESR (Severely
Error Second Ratio), UAS (UnAvailable Seconds) and OFS (Out of
Frame Second), number of pointer change and number of MSP and
RPS switching.
Configuration management facility:
NE configuration is retrieved by the network management terminal
and items such as NE ID, and alarm thresholds can be set as
provisioning.
Resource management facility:
Physical inventory such as unit name, can be read by the SEMF.
Security management:
Several maintenance levels are provided to avoid malfunction.
LCT is the local terminal for network element (NE) windows NT
based.
Software download (SWDL) facility:
Firmware used for SRT 1F operation can be remotely downloaded
from the network management terminal.
Repeater hardware configuration:
Repeater stations and terminals have the same configuration.
SRT 1F
1-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

SDH Radio
1+N
MS Mode
SDH Radio
1+N
MS Mode
SDH MUX
ADM
SDH MUX
LTE
SDH MUX
LTE
Tributary Tributary Tributary
MS MS MS MS

Note:
MS : Multiplex Section LTE : Line Terminal Equipment
RS : Regenerator Section ADM : Add Drop Multiplexer
Network feature : Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) with Section Adaption (SA).
Figure 1-1 - Linear Configuration

SDH MUX
ADM
SDH MUX
LTE
SDH MUX
LTE
SDH Radio
1+N or 0+1
MS Mode
SDH Radio
1+N or 0+1
MS Mode
Tributary Tributary Tributary
MS MS MS MS

Network feature : Network protection switching with media diversity
Figure 1-2 - Media Diversity Configuration

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-5

MS
MS
MS
MS MS
SDH Radio
1+N or 0+1
MS Mode
SDH Radio
1+N or 0+1
MS Mode
SDH MUX
ADM
Tributary
SDH MUX
ADM
Tributary
SDH MUX
ADM
Tributary

Network feature : Network protection switching with ring operation
Figure 1-3 - Standard Ring Configuration

SRT 1F
1-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.2 SRT 1F Equipment Details
1.2.1 Ordering Guide
Assembling an SRT 1F rack means having to select the proper
equipment from the ordering guide. Please contact Siemenss Sales and
Marketing dept. for the current ordering guide.
Figure 1-4 shows the configuration of an (N+1) SRT 1F terminal
equipment.

Figure 1-4 - (N+1, N = max. 7) SRT 1F Terminal Radio Equipment, Alternated operation
BBIU
: Base-Band Interface Unit Subrack, optional for Optical Interface
MSP SW
OPT INTF
BBC
: Base-Band Control Unit x 1
: Multiplex Section Protection SW Unit for OPT INTF
x (Main CHs)
: Optical Interface Unit x (Main CHs)
For usage of MSP x (2 Main CHs)
SCSU
MSTU
BRU
SRT 1F Terminal Equipment
Rack
: Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit Subrack x 1
: ETSI Rack x 1
: RF Branching Network Unit Shelf x 1
RF Branching Network Circuit x (Main CHs + Prot)
: Main Signal Transmission Unit x (Main CHs + Prot)
BSW
TCU
HK
OCC
INTF
ECU
SV
: Supervisory Unit x 1 : Supervisory Unit x 1
: Base-Band Switch Unit x (Main CHs)
: Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option)
: Housekeeping Unit (option) x 2 max.
: Occasional traffic Interface Unit (option) x 1
: Embedded Communication Unit (option) x 2 max.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-7
Figure 1-5 shows the configuration of an SRT 1F terminal radio
equipment operating in the 2(N+1) co-channel operation mode. One
rack is used for vertical polarization, another for horizontal polarization.

Figure 1-5 - 2 x (N+1, N = max. 7) SRT 1F Terminal Radio Equipment,
Co-channel operation
BBIU
: Base-Band Interface Unit (option) x 2
BBC
: Base-Band Control Unit x 2
MSP SW
: Multiplex Section Protection SW Unit for OPT INTF
x (Main CHs)
OPT INTF
: Optical Interface Unit x (Main CHs)
For usage of MSP x (2 Main CHs)
SCSU
MSTU
BRU
SRT 1F Terminal Equipment
Rack
: Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit x 2
: ETSI Rack x 2
: RF Branching Network Unit Shelf x 2
RF Branching Network Circuit x (Main CHs + Prot) x 2
: Main Signal Transmission Unit x (Main CHs + Prot) x 2
BSW
SV
: Supervisory Unit x 1 : Supervisory Unit x 1
: Base-Band Switch Unit x (Main CHs)
TCU
: Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option)
HK
: Housekeeping Unit x 2 max.
OCC
INTF
: Occasional traffic Interface Unit(option) x 2 max.
ECU
: Embedded Communication Unit(option) x 2 max.
BSW INTF
: BSW Interface x 1 for RPS Group 2
SRT 1F
1-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.2.2 BRU (Branching Network Unit)
To define the BRU, the following requirements must be detailed:
i) Operating frequency band
ii) Assigned RF channel number and frequency
iii) System configuration (1+0, 1+1, 2+1,........., 7+1)
iv) Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation
v) With SD (Space Diversity) or without SD
1.2.3 MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit)
To define the MSTU, the following requirements must be detailed:
i) Operating frequency band
ii) Assigned RF channel number and frequency
iii) Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation
Note: SD receiver circuit is equipped as a standard circuit on the SRT
1F receiver.
1.2.4 SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit)
To define the SCSU, the following requirements must be detailed:
i) RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels
ii) Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation
iii) Required optional unit name, such as ECU, HK, TCU, OCC
INTF, and its quantity.
iv) Sub-module of SV unit for RUC (VF, Digital interface or none)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-9
1.2.5 BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit)
To define the BBIU, the following requirements must be detailed:
i) RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels
ii) Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation
iii) Requirement for MSP function.
SRT 1F
1-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.2.6 General Specifications
1.2.7 General Information
Table 1.1 - General Specifications

Description
Modulation 64 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) for 4/5/U6/11 GHz band
128 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) for U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz band
Capacity Alternated operation
One (1) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency
Two (2) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency
Auxiliary signal
Wayside traffic (2.048 Mb/s)
Maximum 2 channels per STM-1 by using RFCOH and SOH.
alternated operation and
2 x (N+1) co-channel operation
Radio User Channel (64 kb/s)
Maximum 2 channels per system using RFCOH for N+1
Maximum 2 channels for N+1 alternated operation or
Maximum 2 x 2 channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation
User Channel (SOH, 64 kb/s)
One (1) channel per STM-1 using SOH
Maximum N channels for N+1 alternated operation or
Maximum 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation
Repeating Method Terminal (back to back connection)
Overhead Byte
Access
Same insertion/extraction method as for SDH fibre optic transmission
system for terminal and repeater station
RS Section
A1, A2, C1, B1, E1, F1, D1D3 byte
MS Section
B2, K1, K2, D4D12 and E2, M1 and S1 byte.

Hypothetical
Reference Digital
Path (HRDP)
In accordance with the latest ITU-R recommendation
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-11
1.2.8 Transmitter (TX)
Table 1.2 - Transmitter section

Description
Output power +32/29 dBm1 dB for 4-L8GHz band
+29 dBm1 dB for 11GHz band
+27 dBm1 dB for 13GHz band
measured at MSTU unit output
Linearity
compensation
Linearizer circuit is employed to maintain optimum linearity
Local carrier RF band oscillation With PLL
Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable
Coverage of upper or lower half of the corresponding band (quarter
band for 11 and 13GHz).
Local Frequency
stability
Within 10 ppm
Spurious emission For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output
< 60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz
< 30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz
IF 1st IF: 70 MHz
2nd IF: 844 MHz
IF input
(Test In)
Signal level: 10 dBm nominal
Variation: 1 dB
Impedance: 75 ohm unbalanced
Return loss: > 20 dB/ 70 MHz 13 MHz for 64 QAM
> 20 dB/ 70 MHz 11 MHz for 128 QAM

RF filter Chebycheff type
3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM
30 MHz for 128 QAM
ATPC

Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) is standard. Power control
level: 10 dB
Response time: 100 ms
Control initiation: Received signal threshold detection
Transmitted output
spectrum
64 MLCM: Figure 1-6
128 MLCM: Figure 1-7
128 MLCM: Figure 1-8

SRT 1F
1-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 1-6 Transmitter output spectrum
(64QAM system, 40 MHz spacing)

(Exclude emissions which result from the modulation process)

RF frequency (MHz)
39.5MHz
-65dB
24MHz
-35dB
14MHz
+1dB
19.5MHz
-10dB
-90
-100
-80
-70
-60
-50
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 100
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
+1
55MHz
-95dB
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-13

RF frequency (MHz)
5 0
-110
34MHz
-65dB
22MHz
-45dB
18MHz
-32dB
17MHz
-32dB
12MHz
+2dB
-100
-90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
15 10 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
14.5MHz
-6dB
32MHz
-85dB
40MHz
-95dB
70
60MHz
-105dB
+2

(128QAM system, 29 / 29.65 MHz spacing)


SRT 1F
1-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

(128QAM system, 28 MHz spacing)


RF frequency (MHz)
5 0
29.5MHz
-65dB
21MHz
-35dB
20MHz
-35dB
13MHz
+1dB
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
15 10 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
+1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-15
1.2.9 Receiver (RX)
Table 1.3 - Receiver section

Description
Noise figure
(Note 1)
1.5 dB typical (for 4 ~ 6 GHz band)
2.0 dB guaranteed (for 4 ~ 6 GHz band
2.0 dB typical (for 7 ~ 8 GHz band)
2.5 dB guaranteed (for 7 ~ 8 GHz band)
2.5 dB typical (for 11 GHz band)
3.0 dB guaranteed (for 11 GHz band)
4.0 dB typical (for 13 GHz band)
4.5 dB guaranteed (for 13 GHz band)
Note 1: Noise figure is measured at the MSTU unit input on both the main and
SD receiver, independently, and at maximum IF amplifier gain.
Local carrier RF band oscillation with PLL
Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable
Half band coverage on lower or upper half of the corresponding band (quarter
band for 11 and 13 GHz band).
Spurious emission For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output
< 60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz
< 30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz
Local Frequency stability Within 10 ppm (11 GHz)
Image rejection More than 100 dB with RX BPF measured at the MSTU output when the image
and main signal levels are equal, and with unmodulated carrier.
Normal received power 32 to 55 dBm
Received input range
(for BER at 1 x 10
3
)
Maximum level: 17 dBm
Minimum level: 74.5 dBm for 64QAM
72.0 dBm for 128QAM
AGC dynamic range 17 to 77 dBm measured at MSTU input
IF 1st IF: 70MHz
2nd IF: 844MHz
IF output (70 MHz)
(Test Out)
Signal level: 10 dBm nominal, +l dB/2 dB variation for 17 to 77 dBm
modulated RX input
Impedance : 75 ohm unbalanced
Return loss : > 20 dB/ 70 MHz 13 MHz for 64 QAM
11 MHz for 128 QAM
Measured at the MSTU unit monitoring point.
RF filter Chebycheff type
3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM
30 MHz for 128 QAM
IF filter Butterworth type
3 dB bandwidth 40 MHz
SRT 1F
1-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.2.10 Modulator (MOD)
Table 1.4 - Modulation
Description
Modulation For 40 MHz Channel spacing:
64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM)
For 28/29/29.65/30 MHz Channel spacing:
128-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM)
Spectrum shaping 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM
or 25 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM
Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution.
Local carrier Crystal oscillator (XO)
Local frequency
stability
Within 15 ppm
IF 70 MHz

1.2.11 Demodulator (DEM)
Table 1.5 - Demodulation
Description
Demodulation Coherent detection/instantaneous decision
Spectrum shaping 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM
or 25 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM
Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution.
IF 70 MHz
Adaptive equalizer
in baseband
10-tap linear transversal equalizer (TVE) and
10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE)
Adaptive equalizer
in IF
Slope equalizer

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-17
1.2.12 Digital Processing
Table 1.6 - Digital Processing

Description
SDH Electrical
interface
CMI-to-unipolar conversion
Unipolar-to-CMI conversion
Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame
Section Adaptation (change the pointer)
Scrambler/descrambler
Addition/drop of section Overhead bit
(1) Framing bit (A1, A2)
(2) Regenerator section party (B1)
(3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3)
(4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1)
(5) User channel (F1)
(6) Multiplex section Parity (B2)
(7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12)
(8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2)
(9) AIS, FERF (K1, K2)
(10) Section trace (J0)
(11) Far End Block Error (M1)
(12) Synchronization status byte (S1)
SDH optical interface Optical-to-electrical conversion
Electrical-to-optical conversion
Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame
Section Adaptation (change the pointer)
Scrambler/descrambler
Addition/drop of section Overhead byte
(1) Framing bit (A1, A2)
(2) Regenerator section parity (B1)
(3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3)
(4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1)
(5) User channel (F1)
(6) Multiplex section Parity (B2)
(7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12)
(8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2)
(9) MSP CONT (K1, K2)
(10) Section trace (J0)
(11) Far End Block Error (M1)
(12) Synchronization status byte (S1)

FERF = Far End Receive Failure
MSP = Multiplex Section Protection
SRT 1F
1-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Table 1.6 - Digital Processing (continued)

Description
For Radio SDH frame to Radio frame conversion
Radio frame complementary Overhead (RFCOH) insertion and detection
(1) Route ID
(2) Radio protection switch (RPS) initiator
(3) Digital service channel
(4) RPS control signal
(5) Far end control signal
(6) Way side traffic
(7) ATPC Control signal
Scrambling
2
15
1 patterns
Route ID 16 addresses pre-settable

ATPC = Automatic Transmit Power Control

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-19
1.2.13 Overall
Table 1.7 Overall
Description
Up-fade BER
BER = 10
3
at RSL of 17 dBm measured at MSTU input
Down-fade BER For 64 QAM MLCM (Figure 1-9):
BER = 10
3
at RSL of 76.5 dBm typical
BER = 10
3
at RSL of 74.5 dBm guaranteed
BER = 10
6
BER = 10
6
Measured at MSTU input
For 128 QAM MLCM (Figure 1-10):
BER = 10
3
BER = 10
3
BER = 10
6
BER = 10
6
Measured at MSTU input
Note 1 : Space Diversity improves RSL by 2 dB.
Note 2 : RSL is 1.0 dB higher for 11 GHz and 2.5 dB higher for 13
GHz.
Note 3 : Down-fade BER at point B is as follows.
64QAM Figure 1-11
128QAM CC Figure 1-12
128QAM AP (7/13GHz) Figure 1-13
Residual BER
BER < Typical:10
13
/hop/day at normal receiving condition
Guaranteed:10
12
/hop/day at normal receiving condition

RSL = Receive Signal Level
SRT 1F
1-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point A (MSTU input)
Figure 1-9 BER vs RSL (64 QAM system)
(Down-fade)
10
-3
BER
10
-6
-70
-72
74 76 -78 -68 [dBm]
BER=10
-3
at RSL=-74.5 dBm
(Guaranteed)
BER=10
-6
at RSL=-70.5 dBm
(Guaranteed)
-76.5 dBm
-73.5 dBm
Typical curve
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-21

Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point A (MSTU input)
(Down-fade)
BER=10
-6
at RSL=-68 dBm
(Guaranteed)
10
-3
BER
10
-6
-68
-70 -72 -74 -76 -66
[dBm]
BER=10
-3
at RSL=-72 dBm
(Guaranteed)
Typical curve
-71.0 dBm
-74.0 dBm
SRT 1F
1-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point B
(Down-fade)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
10
-2
-80 -70 -60
RSL (dBm)
10
-6
10
-7
10
-9
10
-11
10
-10
10
-8
10
-4
10
-3
10
-5
RSL - BER Mask at point B
(64QAM CC)
ETSI
U6G
at A
ETSI 11G
11G
4G
5G
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-23
(Down-fade)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
10
-2
-80 -70
-60
RSL (dBm)
10
-6
10
-7
10
-9
10
-11
10
-10
10
-8
10
-4
10
-3
10
-5
(128QAM CC)
L6G
at A
L8G
ETSI
U4G
SRT 1F
1-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
(Down-fade)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
10
-2
-80 -70 -60
RSL (dBm)
10
-6
10
-7
10
-9
10
-11
10
-10
10
-8
10
-4
10
-3
10
-5
(128QAM AP)
ETSI
at A
U7G
ETSI 13G
L7G
13G
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-25
1.2.14 RF Interference
Table 1.8 - RF Interference

Description
Co-channel
BER = 10
3
at C/I = 22 dB for 64 QAM MLCM and 25 dB for 128
QAM MLCM
measured at duplexer input and RSL of 50 dBm
Adjacent channel
BER = 10
3
at C/I = 33 dB for 64 QAM MLCM and 30 dB for 128
QAM MLCM
measured at duplexer input and RSL of 50 dBm
Innermost channel
C/N degradation at BER = 10
3
: < 1 dB
measured at duplexer input and Inter-Port Isolation (IPI) of 40 dB
XPIC Improvement factor using XPIC for co-channel operation = 18 dB
measured at BER = 10
3
interference curve

The following is the RF waveguide interface to/from the antenna system;

Frequency band Flange (IEC standard)
4 GHz band UDR 40
5 GHz band UDR 48
L6 GHz band UDR 70
7 GHz UDR 70
U6 GHz band UDR 70
L8 GHz band UDR 84
11 GHz band UDR 100
13 GHz band UDR 120

SRT 1F
1-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.2.15 Countermeasures to Fading
Table 1.9 - Countermeasures to Fading

Description
SD In Phase combiner in IF stage LO endless phase shifter
SD DADE Method Two types are available;
Compensation with RF feeder length (equivalent to 25 m), or
Compensation with delay adjuster at IF (equivalent to 120 ns).
SD DADE is adjusted through the delay line on the MSTU unit.
Adaptive Equalizer Adaptive time domain equalizer in baseband 20 tap full digital type
(a) 10-tap transversal equalizer (TVE)
(b) 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE)
Adaptive frequency domain equalizer in IF
(a) Slope equalizer (SLP EQL)
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is inside the
Demodulator module
(optionally configure for co-channel operation only)
FEC Multi-Level Coded Modulation(MLCM)
Coding gain for 64QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=10
3

3.5 dB at BER=10
6

Coding gain for 128QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=10
3

3.7 dB at BER=10
6

ATPC ATPC range: 10 dB
Control speed: 100 dB/sec

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-27
1.2.16 Signal Interface for STM-1 System
1.2.16.1 Base Band Signal Interface
The Base Band Signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T G.957 and
G.703 Recs.
1.2.16.2 Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface
Table 1.10 - Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface (OPT INTF unit)
Bit Rate SDH level 1 155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm
Unit Name OPT INTF 1 OPT INTF 2
Application code (ITU-T G.957) (S-1.1) (L-1.1)
Typical hop 0-15 Km 15-40 Km
Operation wavelength range (nm) 1260-1360 1280-1335
Transmitter at reference point S: Source type * MLM MLM
Spectral characteristics: Maximum RMS width (nm) 7.7 4.0
Maximum 20 dB width (nm)
Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB)
Mean launched power: Maximum(dBm)
Minimum (dBm)
8
15
0
5
Mi Bit rate minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10
Optical path between S & R: Attenuation range (dB)
Maximum dispersion (ps/nm)
012
96
1028
N/A
Optical path between S and R: Attenuation range 0-12 10-28
Maximum dispersion (ps/nm) 96 186
Minimum optical return loss of cable point at S, including
and connectors (dB)
NA NA
Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R NA NA
Receiving at reference point R
Minimum sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload
Maximum optical path penalty (including chirp penalty and
dispersion penalty (dB)
Maximum reflectance of receiver,
measured at R (dB)

28
8

1

NA

34
10

1

NA
Connector Used SC type or FC type
* Note : MLM = Multi-Longitudinal Mode
SLM = Single-Longitudinal Mode
SRT 1F
1-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.2.16.3 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface
Table 1.11 - Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface (BSW unit)
Bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm
Code format Coded Mark Inversion (CMI)
Pulse mask In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703
Impedance 75-ohm nominal, unbalanced
Return loss > 15 dB / 8~240 MHz, measured at base band input port
Input cable
length
The attenuation of the coaxial cable pair should be assumed to follow an approximately
root f law and to have a maximum insertion loss of 12.7 dB at a frequency of 78 MHz.
Coaxial cable 2.5C-2V or equivalent
Connector
used
27CP coaxial connector.
1.2.16.4 Jitter
Jitter tolerance
The SRT 1F radio equipment tolerates the input jitter applied according
to ITU-T Rec. G.958 with Type A specified on Table 2.
Jitter transfer
The SRT 1F radio equipment meets the jitter transfer specification given
in ITU-T Rec. G.958 Figure 6.2 with the jitter transfer parameter
specified for Type B in Table 1/G.958 when sinusoidal jitter up to the
mask level in Figure 6.3/G.958 with the jitter tolerance parameter
specified for Type A in Table 2/G.958 is applied at the STM-1 input.
1.2.16.5 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Terminal
When the Base Band signal (optical/electrical) or radio signal from the
optical equipment or radio equipment is lost, the SRT 1F generates a
AU- AIS (MS mode) the next equipment
When the AU-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT
1F transfer the AU-AIS to the next equipment after SOH processing.
When MS-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal and transfers
AU-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH and MSOH processing (in
case of MS operation).

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-29
1.2.16.6 BSI
Transmission
Transparent transmission (BSI transmission). The property of a binary
transmission channel, telecommunication circuit or connection, that
permits all sequences of binary signal elements to be conveyed over it
at its specified bit rate, without change to the value of any signal
elements.

1.2.17 Auxiliary Signal Interface
1.2.17.1 Radio User Channel (RUC)
Table 1.12 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (RUC)
Transmission - Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH bits
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) per system
Interface Combination of VF and 64 kbit/s available by mounting optional sub-PCB
module on the SV units.
VF interface Input level : 16 dBr nominal (16 to-0.5 dBr, 0.5 step)
Output level: +7 dBr nominal (8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step)
Voice maximum level: 3 dBm
o

No. of CH Maximum 2 CH
Amplitude response: In accordance with ITU-T G.712
Signal-to-distortion: In accordance with ITU-T G.712
Impedance 600- balanced
Digital interface Interface: Co-directional or contra-directional
Connector used Multi-pin connector
1.2.17.2 Way Side (WS)
Table 1.13 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (WS)
Capacity 2048 kbit/s x 2 per STM-1
Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH and/or SOH bits
One wayside traffic is transferred through RFCOH bits, the other is through
undefined bytes in SOH
Digital interface In accordance with ITU-T G.703 Rec.
Connector used Multi-pin connector for 120 balanced
Coaxial connector, 27CP for 75 unbalanced

SRT 1F
1-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.2.17.3 Order Wire (OW)
Table 1.14 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (OW)
Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from E1 and E2 of SOH.
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony)
Express orderwire and omnibus orderwire
Interface 2-W for internal telephone set and external use
4-W for branching connector
Interface level
2W Interface
Input level : 0.0 dBr nominal
Output level : 2.0 dBr nominal
o
4W Interface
Input level : 4 dBr nominal (16 to 0.5 dBr, 0.5 step)
Output level : 4 dBr nominal (8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step)
o

1.2.17.4 User Channel (UC)
Table 1.15 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (User Channel)
Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from F1 byte of SOH.
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 1 (equivalent to 1 CH telephony) per STM-1
Interface 64 kbit/s
Interface Interface : Co-directional or contra directional
Pulse mask: In accordance with ITU-T G.703
Connector used Multi-pin connector

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-31
1.3 Mechanical Specification
1.3.1 General
Rack has dimension as follows:
2200 mm height
600 mm width
300 mm depth

*
1
The dimensions include all protruding parts
Figure 1-14 - Front view of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment
Base-Band Interface Unit
(option)
Supervisory, Control & Switching
Unit
RF Branching Network Unit
Main Signal Transmission Unit
BBIU
SCSU
MSTU
BRU
2
2
0
0

600
300
342.5*
1
SRT 1F
1-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.3.2 Rack construction
It consists of:
Rack
RF Branching network part (BRU block)
Shelves with PCB backplane (MSTU/SCSU blocks)
Optional shelf with PCB backplane (BBIU blocks)
Slide-in-units(SIU)

The following connectors and power supply terminals are on the PCB
backplane:
Multi-pin and co-axial connectors for data
Multi-pin connectors for alarm and status output for housekeeping
bits
Power supply terminal from power supply system.
The shelves comprise the main signal transmission unit (MSTU),
supervisory control and switching unit (SCSU), baseband interface unit
(BBIU) and RF branching network unit (BRU).
A multi-layer PCB backplane is used for plug-in units.
Multi-pin connectors on the backplane have high-reliability features and
are provided with facilities which prevent wrong insertion.
The BBIU shelf is used only for terminal configuration with optical
interface.
The RF branching network is housed above the MSTU shelf.
The RF branching network consists of RF band pass filters and,
circulators for channel separation.
The RF branching network and the MSTU units are connected through
semi-rigid coaxial cables with SMA coaxial connectors via an MSTU
adapter.
All units are of the plug-in type hence needing no wiring during the
installation and maintenance works. Units have card-pullers for easy
card extraction and unit locking. All units can be accessed through front
panel.
1.3.3 Inter-Rack Connections
Inter-rack cabling and connections are made on the PCB backplane
through multi-pin connectors.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-33
1.3.4 Rack Layout
Typical rack configurations for terminal and repeater stations are shown
in Figure 1-15 and Figure 1-16.
The terminal equipment has the following facilities;
One BRU
Maximum eight (8) MSTUs (8 RF system) per rack
One SCSU
One optional BBIU for STM-1 Optical interface
The repeater equipment (one-end) has the following facilities;
One BRU
Maximum eight (8) MSTUs (8 RF system) per rack
One SCSU

Figure 1-15 - (7+1) Alternated operation Terminal Station
Vertical (V) and Horizontal (H) polarization
BBIU
SCSU
MSTU
BRU
SRT 1F
1-34 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
A co-channel operating terminal station (up to 1+7 system) consists of
two (2) equipment racks of opposite polarization as shown in Figure
1-16.

Figure 1-16 - 2 x (7+1) Co-channel operating Terminal Station

H-polarization V-polarization
BBIU
SCSU
MSTU
BRU
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-35
1.3.5 Unit Layout
Figure 1-17 shows the unit layout on the MSTU shelf. Maximum eight
(8) MSTU units can be mounted in one MSTU.

Figure 1-17 - Front view of the MSTU shelf

Figure 1-18 shows the unit layout on the SCSU. One block can
accomodate, one SV unit, one TCU unit, and maximum seven (7) BSW
units.
In addition to the above units, one back-up TCU unit, two HK units, one
OCC INTF unit, and two ECU units can be optionally mounted.

Figure 1-18 - Front view of the SCSU shelf
RPS Group 2
RPS Group 1
SRT 1F
1-36 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Figure 1-19 shows the unit layout on the BBIU for STM-1 optical
interface. One block can accomodate, a maximum of fifteen (15) OPT
INTF units, seven (7) MSP SW units, and one BBC unit.

Figure 1-19 - Front view of the STM-1 optical interface BBIU shelf

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-37
1.4 Environmental Specification
Temperature and Humidity

Performance guaranteed within the solid line below
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 95
0
10
35
45
Relative Humidity (%)
Temperature (C)
Short term operation 5 to 50C
Note : Short term is defined as a period not exceeding 72
consecutive hours or a total of 15 days per year. In this case
equipment is operable, but performance is not guaranteed
Storage/shipping Temperature: 20C to +55C, Humidity: 0% to 95% (@35C)
Altitude
Performance guaranteed Up to 3,500 meters
Storage/shipping Up to 15,000 meters
Vibration
In accordance with ETSI
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 801-2
Level 3 (4 kV direct discharge) without any malfunction
Level 4 (8 kV direct discharge) with some degraded
performance, but without damage
Radiated emission In accordance with CISPR Pub.22 CLASS A, 10m method
< 39.5 dB V/m for 30.0 to 230.0 MHz
< 46.5 dB V/m for 230.0 to 1000.0 MHz
Conducted emission In accordance with CISPR Pub.22 CLASS A
< 66 dB V/m for 0.15 to 0.5 MHz (average energy)
< 60 dB V/m for 0.5 to 30.0 MHz (average energy)
Radiated susceptibility In accordance with IEC 801-3
3 V/m, swept 80 MHz to 1 GHz without any malfunction
SRT 1F
1-38 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.5 Power Requirements
1.5.1 General
All the equipment is DC power supplied with positive ground.
DC input voltage, 48V (36 V to 72 V) is available.
The power supply circuits of all the equipment provide the following:
Over current protection (Secondary)
Over voltage protection (Secondary)
Surge protection (Primary) : Vp = 2 kV
Rise and fall time (Vp/2) : tr = 1.2 sec, tf = 50 sec.
A power supply switch with non-fuse breaker is located on each MSTU,
SCSU, and BBIU.
1.5.2 Unit Power Consumption
The power consumption of each unit is shown in Table 1.16 - Power
Consumption of each unit.

Table 1.16 - Power Consumption of each unit
No. Unit Pc (W) Remarks
1 MSTU without XPIC 4-8 GHz 170 + 32 dBm output without SD
2 MSTU with XPIC 4-8 GHz 175 + 32 dBm output with SD
3 MSTU without XPIC 4-8 GHz 130 + 29 dBm output without SD
4 MSTU with XPIC 4-8 GHz 135 + 29 dBm output with SD
5 MSTU without XPIC 11-13GHz 155
6 MSTU with XPIC 11 GHz 160
7 SV 20
8 TCU 12
9 BSW 2/9*
1
secondary +5V from MSTU-P
10 BSW INTF 2 secondary +5V from MSTU-P
11 HK (optional unit) 5 secondary +5V from SV
12 ECU (optional unit) 6 secondary +5V from SV
13 OPT INTF (optional unit) 24
14 BBC (optional unit) 5
15 MSP SW (optional unit) 0.5 secondary +5V from OPT INTF
Note1: Under working of protection channel.
Note: Unit power consumption includes efficiency of power supply module. (80 %)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-39
1.6 Frequency Plan and Antenna System
1.6.1 General Information
Table 1.17 shows the ITU-R recommendations for the radio frequency
plan.
Table 1.17 - ITU-R Recommendations.
Band Recommendation
U4 GHz band ITU-R Recommendation F.382-6
4 GHz band ITU-R Recommendation F.635-3
5 GHz band ITU-R Recommendation F.1099 Annex-1
L6 GHz band ITU-R Recommendation F.383-5
11 GHz band ITU-R Recommendation F.387-6,
ITU-R Recommendation F.387-6 Annex 2
13 GHz band ITU-R Recommendation F.497-4

1.6.2 Frequency Plan
The frequency allocation for the Upper 4 GHz band is as follows:
3803.5 to 4203.5 MHz
Center frequency 4003.5 MHz
Guard band 21 MHz (Lower band and upper band)
Center gap 68 MHz
29 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation)
58 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)
213 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
5+1 protection system for alternated operation
2(5+1) protection system for co-channel operation
Specified RF frequency shown in Figure 1-20.
SRT 1F
1-40 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
The frequency allocation for the 4 GHz band is as follows:
3600 to 4200 MHz
Center frequency 3900 MHz
Center gap 80 MHz
Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1-21
4400 to 5000 MHz
Center gap 60 MHz
The frequency allocation for the Lower 6 GHz band is as follows:
5925 to 6425 MHz
Guard band 20.2 MHz (Lower band) and 20.21 MHz (Upper band)
Center gap 44.49 MHz
29.65 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation)
59.30 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)
252.04 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
2(7+1)protection system for co-channel operation
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-41

6430 to 7110 MHz
Center gap 60 MHz

7125 to 7425 MHz
Guard band 10 MHz (Lower band) and 17 MHz (Upper band)
Center gap 49 MHz

7425 to 7725 MHz
Center gap 42 MHz
SRT 1F
1-42 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
7725 to 8275 MHz
Guard band
Center gap 103.77 MHz
29.65 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation)
59.30 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)
311.32 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

10700 to 11700 MHz
Guard band 15 MHz for 12 pair system
Center gap 90 MHz for 12 pair system

The frequency allocation for the 11 GHz band Annex 2 is as
follows;
10700 to 11700 MHz
Guard band 35 MHz for 12 pair system
Center gap 50 MHz for 12 pair system

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-43
12750 to 13250 MHz
Guard band 15 MHz (Lower band) and 23 MHz (Upper band)
Center gap 70 MHz
Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1-30.
SRT 1F
1-44 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.6.2.1 U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
400 MHz
213 MHz
21 MHz 21 MHz 58 MHz
29 MHz
68 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x
1 2 3 4 5 6
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x
1 2 3 4 5 6
400 MHz
213 MHz
21 MHz 21 MHz 58 MHz
29 MHz
68 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
Alternated operation

Figure 1-20 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)

Table 1.18 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)
RF CH RF FREQUENCY(MHz) LO FREQUENCY(MHz)
1 3824.5 2980.5
2 3853.5 3009.5
3 3882.5 3038.5
4 3911.5 3067.5
5 3940.5 3096.5
6 3969.5 3125.5
1' 4037.5 3193.5
2' 4066.5 3222.5
3' 4095.5 3251.5
4' 4124.5 3280.5
5' 4153.5 3309.5
6' 4182.5 3338.5
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-45
1.6.2.2 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
600 MHz
320 MHz
20 MHz 80 MHz
40 MHz
80 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
600 MHz
320 MHz
20 MHz 20 MHz 80MHz
40 MHz
80 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
V(H)
H(V)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
20 MHz

Figure 1-21 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)

Table 1.19 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)
1 3620.0 2776.0
2 3660.0 2816.0
3 3700.0 2856.0
4 3740.0 2896.0
5 3780.0 2936.0
6 3820.0 2976.0
7 3860.0 3016.0
1 3940.0 3096.0
2 3980.0 3136.0
3 4020.0 3176.0
4 4060.0 3216.0
5 4100.0 3256.0
6 4140.0 3296.0
7 4180.0 3336.0
SRT 1F
1-46 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.6.2.3 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
600 MHz
300 MHz
30 MHz 80 MHz
40 MHz
60 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
600 MHz
300 MHz
30 MHz 30 MHz 80MHz
40 MHz
60 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
V(H)
H(V)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
30 MHz

Figure 1-22 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1)
Table 1.20 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1)
1 4430.0 3586.0
2 4470.0 3626.0
3 4510.0 3666.0
4 4550.0 3706.0
5 4590.0 3746.0
6 4630.0 3786.0
7 4670.0 3826.0
1 4730.0 3886.0
2 4770.0 3926.0
3 4810.0 3966.0
4 4850.0 4006.0
5 4890.0 4046.0
6 4930.0 4086.0
7 4970.0 4126.0
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-47
1.6.2.4 L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
252.04 MHz
20.2 MHz 59.3 MHz
29.65 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
252.04 MHz
20.2 MHz 59.3 MHz
29.65 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
500 MHz
44.49 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
20.21 MHz
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
8
500 MHz
20.21 MHz
44.49 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8

Figure 1-23 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5)
Table 1.21 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5)
RF CH RF FREQUENCY (MHz) LO FREQUENCY (MHz)
1 5945.20 5101.20
2 5974.85 5130.85
3 6004.50 5160.50
4 6034.15 5190.15
5 6063.80 5219.80
6 6093.45 5249.45
7 6123.10 5279.10
8 6152.75 5308.75
1 6197.24 5353.24
2 6226.89 5382.89
3 6256.54 5412.54
4 6286.19 5442.19
5 6315.84 5471.84
6 6345.49 5501.49
7 6375.14 5531.14
8 6404.79 5560.79
SRT 1F
1-48 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.6.2.5 U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
340 MHz
30 MHz 80 MHz
40 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
340 MHz
30 MHz 30 MHz
40 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
680 MHz
60 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
30 MHz
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
8
680 MHz
30 MHz
60 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8

Figure 1-24 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)
Table 1.22 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)
RF CH RF Frequency (MHz) LO Frequency MHz)
1 6460.0 5616.0
2 6500.0 5656.0
3 6540.0 5696.0
4 6580.0 5736.0
5 6620.0 5776.0
6 6660.0 5816.0
7 6700.0 5856.0
8 6740.0 5896.0
1 6800.0 5956.0
2 6840.0 5996.0
3 6880.0 6036.0
4 6920.0 6076.0
5 6960.0 6116.0
6 7000.0 6156.0
7 7040.0 6196.0
8 7080.0 6236.0
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-49
10 MHz
1 2 3 4 5
161 MHz
56 MHz
28 MHz
300 MHz
49 MHz
1 2 3 4 5
17MHz
V(H)
H(V)


1 7135 6291
2 7163 6319
3 7191 6347
4 7219 6375
5 7247 6403
1 7296 6452
2 7324 6480
3 7352 6508
4 7380 6536
5 7408 6564
SRT 1F
1-50 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.6.2.7 U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)
17 MHz
1 2 3 4 5
154 MHz
56 MHz
28 MHz
300 MHz
42 MHz
1 2 3 4 5
17MHz
V(H)
H(V)

Figure 1-26 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)
Table 1.24 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)
1 7442 6598
2 7470 6626
3 7498 6654
4 7526 6682
5 7554 6710
1 7596 6752
2 7624 6780
3 7652 6808
4 7680 6836
5 7708 6864
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-51

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
311.32 MHz
22.7 MHz 59.3 MHz
29.65 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
311.32 MHz
22.7 MHz 59.3 MHz
29.65 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
550 MHz
103.77 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.43 MHz
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x
550 MHz
8.43MHz
103.77 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 7747.70 6903.70
2 7777.35 6933.35
3 7807.00 6963.00
4 7836.65 6992.65
5 7866.30 7022.30
6 7895.95 7051.95
7 7925.60 7081.60
8 7955.25 7111.25
1 8059.02 7215.02
2 8088.67 7244.67
3 8118.32 7274.32
4 8147.97 7303.97
5 8177.62 7333.62
6 8207.27 7363.27
7 8236.92 7392.92
8 8266.57 7422.57
SRT 1F
1-52 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.6.2.9 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6)

1 2 3 4 10 11 12
530 MHz
15 MHz 80 MHz
40 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x
1 2 3 4 10 11 12
530 MHz
15 MHz 80 MHz
40 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1000 MHz
90 MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12
15MHz
1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x
1000 MHz
15MHz
90 MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12

Figure 1-28 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6)
Table 1.26 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6)
1 10715.0 9871.0
2 10755.0 9911.0
3 10795.0 9951.0
4 10835.0 9991.0
5 10875.0 10031.0
6 10915.0 10071.0
7 10955.0 10111.0
8 10995.0 10151.0
9 11035.0 10191.0
10 11075.0 10231.0
11 11115.0 10271.0
12 11155.0 10311.0
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-53
Table 1.26 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) (Continued)
1 11245.0 10401.0
2 11285.0 10441.0
3 11325.0 10481.0
4 11365.0 10521.0
5 11405.0 10561.0
6 11445.0 10601.0
7 11485.0 10641.0
8 11525.0 10681.0
9 11565.0 10721.0
10 11605.0 10761.0
11 11645.0 10801.0
12 11685.0 10841.0

SRT 1F
1-54 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.6.2.10 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6 Annex-2)

1 2 3 4 10 11 12
490 MHz
35 MHz 80 MHz
40 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x
1 2 3 4 10 11 12
490 MHz
35 MHz 80 MHz
40 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
1000 MHz
50 MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12
35MHz
1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x
1000 MHz
35MHz
50 MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12

Figure 1-29 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6 Annex-2)
Table 1.27 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6 Annex-2)
1 10735.0 9891.0
2 10775.0 9931.0
3 10815.0 9971.0
4 10855.0 10011.0
5 10895.0 10051.0
6 10935.0 10091.0
7 10975.0 10131.0
8 11015.0 10171.0
9 11055.0 10211.0
10 11095.0 10251.0
11 11135.0 10291.0
12 11175.0 10331.0
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-55
Table 1.27 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6 Annex-2) (Continued)
RF CH RF
FREQUENCY(MHz)
LO
FREQUENCY(MHz)
1 11225.0 10381.0
2 11265.0 10421.0
3 11305.0 10461.0
4 11345.0 10501.0
5 11385.0 10541.0
6 11425.0 10581.0
7 11465.0 10621.0
8 11505.0 10661.0
9 11545.0 10701.0
10 11585.0 10741.0
11 11625.0 10781.0
12 11665.0 10821.0

SRT 1F
1-56 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1.6.3 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
266 MHz
15 MHz 56 MHz
28 MHz
V(H)
H(V)
500MHz
70 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
23 MHz

Figure 1-30 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4)

Table 1.28 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4)
1 12765 11921
2 12793 11949
3 12821 11977
4 12849 12005
5 12877 12033
6 12905 12061
7 12933 12089
8 12961 12117
1 13031 12187
2 13059 12215
3 13087 12243
4 13115 12271
5 13143 12299
6 13171 12327
7 13199 12355
8 13227 12383

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-57
1.6.4 RF Branching Network
The RF branching network for alternate operation is shown in Figure
1-31 to Figure 1-32.
Figure 1-31 shows (7+1) BRU with SD for alternated operation using a
dual polarization antenna. When expansion of this system is requested,
co-channel operation will be applied.
Figure 1-32 shows 2(7+1) BRU with SD for co-channel operation.

SRT 1F
1-58 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

DUP
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
ch-7 ch-5
ch-3 ch-1
V-TRANSMIT SIDE
CIR BPF BPF
ch-7 ch-5
CIR BEF BPF BPF
ch-3 ch-1
MTSU ch-1
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-6
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-2
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-7
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-3
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-5
(SD receiver)
DUP
CIR BEF BPF BPF
ch-6 ch-8
CIR BPF BPF
ch-2 ch-4
H-TRANSMIT SIDE
MTSU ch-8
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-4
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-6
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-2
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-5
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-7
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-3
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-1
(Transmitter)
MAIN ANT
CIR BPF BPF
ch-6 ch-8
CIR BPF BPF
ch-4 ch-2
CIR BPF BPF
ch-4 ch-2
V or H
H or V
V or H
H or V
SD ANT
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
BEF
ch-5 ch-7
ch-1 ch-3
Vertical or Horizontal polarization
V-RECEIVE SIDE
CIR BPF BPF
ch-6 ch-8
H-RECEIVE SIDE
MTSU ch-8
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-1
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-5
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-3
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-7
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-4
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-6
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-2
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-4
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-8
(SD receiver)
Horizontal or Vertical polarization
BRU

Figure 1-31 - (7+1) BRU for alternated operation

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 1-59

DUP
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
ch-4 ch-2
ch-3 ch-1
MTSU ch-2
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-4
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-3
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-1
(Transmitter)
MAIN ANT
V or H
H or V
BEF
Vertical or Horizontal polarization
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
BEF
ch-2 ch-4
ch-1 ch-3
MTSU ch-1
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-2
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-3
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-4
(MN receiver)
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
ch-6 ch-8
ch-7 ch-5
MTSU ch-8
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-6
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-7
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-5
(Transmitter)
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
BEF
ch-6 ch-8
ch-7 ch-5
MTSU ch-7
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-6
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-5
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-8
(MN receiver)
BRU-1
MTSU ch-2
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-1
(SD receiver)
CIR BPF BPF
ch-2 ch-4
CIR BPF BPF
ch-3 ch-1
MTSU ch-3
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-4
(SD receiver)
BEF
V or H
SD ANT
MTSU ch-6
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-5
(SD receiver)
CIR BPF BPF
ch-6 ch-8
CIR BPF BPF
ch-7 ch-5
MTSU ch-7
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-8
(SD receiver)
DUP
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
ch-4 ch-2
ch-3 ch-1
MTSU ch-2
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-4
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-3
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-1
(Transmitter)
H or V
BEF
Horizontal or Vertical polarization
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
BEF
ch-2 ch-4
ch-1 ch-3
MTSU ch-1
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-2
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-3
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-4
(MN receiver)
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
ch-6 ch-8
ch-7 ch-5
MTSU ch-8
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-6
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-7
(Transmitter)
MTSU ch-5
(Transmitter)
CIR BPF BPF
CIR BPF BPF
BEF
ch-6 ch-8
ch-7 ch-5
MTSU ch-7
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-6
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-5
(MN receiver)
MTSU ch-8
(MN receiver)
BRU-2
MTSU ch-2
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-1
(SD receiver)
CIR BPF BPF
ch-2 ch-4
CIR BPF BPF
ch-3 ch-1
MTSU ch-3
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-4
(SD receiver)
BEF
MTSU ch-6
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-5
(SD receiver)
CIR BPF BPF
ch-6 ch-8
CIR BPF BPF
ch-7 ch-5
MTSU ch-7
(SD receiver)
MTSU ch-8
(SD receiver)

Figure 1-32 - 2 (7+1) BRU with SD for co-channel operation

SRT 1F
1-60 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

UMN 2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-1
2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Equipment Configurations and Features
2.1.1 SRT 1F System
The SRT 1F radio equipment is designed to transmit STM-1 (155.520
Mb/s) signals. The SRT 1F is equipped with N+1 Radio Protection
System (RPS).
Possible configurations of the SRT 1F are:
Terminal with STM-1 Electrical Interface (SE INTF).
Terminal with STM-1 Optical Interface with Multiplex Section
Protection (OPT INTF with MSP)).
Terminal with STM-1 Optical Interface without Multiplex Section
Protection (OPT INTF without MSP).

The SRT 1F consists of four functional blocks:
BRU: Branching Network Unit with RF filters, circulators and a
duplexer for RF combining/branching and interface to/from the
antenna system.
MSTU: Main Signal Transmission Unit with Transmitter (TX),
Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1
Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions.
SCSU: Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit with Supervisory (SV),
Bipolar Switch (BSW), Timing Control (TCU), Embedded
Communication (ECU) and Housekeeping (HK) functions.
BBIU: Base-Band Interface Unit with Baseband Interface for STM-1
Optical. Multiplex Section Protection Switches (MSPSW) are also
accommodated in this unit. The BBIU is optional for the Terminal
with OPT INTF.
Figure 2-1 shows the standard equipment layout.
2.1.2 Terminal
The SRT 1F consists of Terminal equipment
The terminal equipment has full facilities; signal transmission, protection
switching and baseband interface.

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION UMN
SRT 1F
2-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 2-1 - Standard Equipment Layout (not in scale)

Connection
Area
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W

6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
B
B

I
N
T
F

P

B
B
C

B
B

I
N
T
F

Y

B
B

I
N
T
F

X

[M1]
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y

B
B

I
N
T
F

X

[M2]
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y

B
B

I
N
T
F

X

[M3]
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y

B
B

I
N
T
F

X

[M4]
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y

B
B

I
N
T
F

X

[M5]
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y

B
B

I
N
T
F

X

[M6]
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y

B
B

I
N
T
F

X

[M7]

*

O
C
C

I
N
T
F

H
K
2

H
K
1

T
C
U

Y

T
C
U

X

B
S
W
7

B
S
W
6

B
S
W
5

B
S
W
4

B
S
W
3

B
S
W
2

B
S
W
1

S
V

E
C
U
2

E
C
U
1

Connection
Area

BRU
M
S
T
U
1

[ P ]
M
S
T
U
2

[M1]
M
S
T
U
3

[M2]
M
S
T
U
4

[M3]
M
S
T
U
6

[M5]
M
S
T
U
5

[M4]
M
S
T
U
7

[M6]
M
S
T
U
8

[M7]
BB INTF (X/Y) :
OPT INTF (X/Y) for STM-1 Optical Interface with MSP
*OPT INTF(X) for STM-1 Optical Interface without MSP

BRU
Branching Network Unit

MSTU
Main Signal Transmission Unit

SCSU
Supervisory, Control &
Switching Unit

BBIU (option)
BaseBand Interface Unit

BBIU is optional for the
Terminal equipment of the
Optical interface

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-3
Figure 2-2 shows the Terminal equipment configuration.
The BBIU is installed for the Terminal with Optical interface, but not for
the STM-1 Electrical interface.

Figure 2-2 - Equipment Configuration for Terminal
BBIU
SCSU
MSTU
BRU
Terminal Equipment with
OPT INTF
b) a)
BRU
MSTU
SCSU

Terminal Equipment with
SE INTF
SRT 1F
2-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

2.1.3 Baseband Interface
The SRT 1F has three types of baseband interface:
SE INTF: STM-1 Electrical Interface, the basic type of interface. The
SRT 1F with SE INTF is composed of BRU, MSTU and SCSU.
Figure 2-3 shows the schematic diagram.
OPT INTF (with MSP): STM-1 Optical Interface Multiplex Section,
the type of interface with optical line protection (MSP). The SRT 1F
with OPT INTF (MS) is composed of BRU, MSTU, SCSU and BBIU.
Figure 2-4 shows the schematic diagram.
OPT INTF (without MSP): STM-1 Optical Interface Regenerator
Section, the type of interface without optical line protection. The SRT
1F with OPT INTF (RS) is composed of BRU, MSTU, SCSU and
BBIU. Figure 2-5 shows the schematic diagram.
2.1.4 Alternated and Co-channel Operation
The SRT 1F can provide two frequency allocation systems as follows:
Alternated operation:
An STM-1 signal is transmitted by an RF frequency using single
polarization.
Co-channel operation:
Two STM-1 signals are transmitted simultaneously by an RF
frequency using dual polarization. This system is provided as an
option to double the spectrum efficiency. The transmission capacity
of Way side and User channel will be doubled through this co-
channel operation system.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-5
Figure 2-3 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Electrical Interface
Terminal without SD (Space Diversity).

Figure 2-3 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1
Electrical Interface Terminal

BSW

BSW

BSW
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
DUP
WS R,S
UC(F1)
WS R,S
UC(F1)
WS R,S
UC(F1)

STM-1
Electrical
In/out
To/from Main N STM-1 CMI STM-1 Unipolar
UC(F1)
WS R,S
SCSU
BRU
NOTE :
BRU : Branching Network Unit
MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit
SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit

STM-1 CMI
Main 1 STM-1 CMI
Main 3 STM-1 CMI
Main 2 STM-1 CMI
Prot CH
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
OSSI (X25/Q3)
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SRT 1F
2-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Figure 2-4 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface
Terminal with MSP and without SD.
This configuration provides Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) for the
optical line interface.

Optical Interface Terminal with MSP

BSW

BSW

BSW
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
DUP
STM-1
Optical
In/out
X
Main 1
Y
X
Main 2
Y
X
Main 3
Y
UC(F1)
WS R,S
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
OSSI (X25/Q3)
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU
BBIU
BRU
NOTE :
BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit
STM-1 CMI Prot CH

MSP
SW
OPT
INTF
OPT
INTF
WS R,S

UC(F1)
STM-1 CMI

MSP
SW
OPT
INTF
OPT
INTF
WS R,S

UC(F1)
STM-1 CMI

MSP
SW
OPT
INTF
OPT
INTF
WS R,S

UC(F1)
STM-1 CMI
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-7
Figure 2-5 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface
Terminal without MSP and without SD.

Optical Interface Terminal without MSP
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
OSSI (X25/Q3)
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON

MSP
SW

MSP
SW

MSP
SW

BSW

BSW

BSW
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
DUP
WS R,S

WS R,S

WS R,S

UC(F1)

UC(F1)

UC(F1)
STM-1
Optical
In/out
Main 1

Main 2

Main 3

UC(F1)
WS R,S
SCSU
BBIU
BRU
NOTE :
STM-1 CMI
STM-1 CMI
STM-1 CMI
STM-1 CMI
Prot CH
OPT
INTF
OPT
INTF
OPT
INTF
SRT 1F
2-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.2 STM-1 Signal Transmission
2.2.1 STM-1 Electrical Signal Interface
SCSU
The STM-1 Electrical signal input/output terminals are located on the
BSW (Bipolar Switch) front panel on the SCSU (Supervisory, Control &
Switching Unit).
BBIU
Input/output terminals for STM-1 Optical are located on the front panels
of the OPT INTF unit of BBIU (Baseband interface unit). The Optical
STM-1 is converted to the STM-1 CMI signal and sent to the BSW unit
of the SCSU.
2.2.2 Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function)
The MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) is composed of Transmitter
(TX), Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1
Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions. The Unipolar Switch (USW) for
the Radio Protection System (RPS) is also a part of the MSTU.
SE INTF
The STM-1 CMI signal inputs from the BSW unit of SCSU. The
incoming STM-1 CMI signal is converted to eight unipolar signal streams
and applied to the Transmit Data Processing (TDP) circuit.
TDP
The TDP circuit processes drop/insert the Multiplex Section Overhead
(MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) to be terminated
from the STM-1 data. The AU-Pointer is also re-written. A Unipolar
Switch (USW) provides hitless switching for the Radio Protection
System. After the USW, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
(RFCOH) is applied to the incoming STM-1 signal to compose the Radio
Frame. The RFCOH is composed of Radio Frame Alignment, Wayside,
Radio Service Channel, RPS Control, Redundancy bit for MLCM and
other signals. Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) is provided to
perform forward error correction on the data to transmit across the radio
section.
QAM MOD Module
The Radio Frame inputs the QAM Modulator Module (QAM MOD
Module). The QAM MOD Module is composed of a spectrum shaping
device and a Modulator controller (MOD), the Digital to analog converter
(D/A) and the Quadrature Amplitude Modulator (QAM) to generate the
QAM signal. The QAM MOD Module output is applied to the Transmit
IF (TIF) circuit.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-9
TIF
The incoming QAM signal is converted to the 1
st
IF (70MHz) signal.
The 1
st
IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then applied to the
Linearizer (LNZ). The LNZ works to compensate the distortion which is
caused by the non-linearity of the RF transmit circuit.
The 1
st
IF signal is converted to the 2
nd
IF (844MHz) signal, then applied
to the Transmit RF Module (TRF Module).
TRF Module
The TRF accepts the 2
nd
IF and converts it to the Radio Frequency (RF)
by mixing it with the signal outputting from the Local Oscillator Module
(LO Module). The RF signal is amplified through RF amplifiers. The
MSTU output level is +29 dBm (+ 27 dBm for 13 GHz). It is controlled by
the Automatic Level Control (ALC) which keeps it constant against input
signal level, amplifier gain and other ambient factor variations. High
power version transmitting +32dBm is available from 4 GHz to 8 GHz.
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) can automatically control the
MSTU output power within +29 dBm (HIGH) and +19 dBm (LOW) based
on the propagation loss across the radio section. The ATPC
automatically changes the MSTU output level back to HIGH when the
RX receiving level becomes lower than the specified level. ATPC is an
option setting through the LCT. This function is provided to save the
power drained by the MSTU and improve possible interference on
adjacent frequency channels and opposite polarization.
The MSTU output is applied to the Branching Network Unit (BRU), then
to the antenna. The spurious emission of the transmitter is suppressed
by the BRUs Band-Pass Filter (BPF).
LO Module
The LO Module is a phase-locked loop oscillator circuit supplying the RF
Local signals to the Transmitter and Receiver. The oscillation frequency
setting is based on MSTU operation frequency.
RRF Module
The Receive RF Module (RRF Module) accepts the received RF signal
from the antenna through BRU. Receiver selectivity is determined by the
BRUs BPF.
The received RF signal (standard level : - 35 dBm, AGC dynamic
range:
- 17 dBm to - 70s dBm) is amplified by a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA),
then converted to the 2
nd
IF (844MHz). The 2
nd
IF signal is amplified and
applied to the Receive IF (RIF) circuit.
RIF
The 2
nd
IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then converted to the
1
st
IF (70MHz). The 1
st
IF signal is applied to the DEM circuit. The Rx
amplifiers are Automatically Gain Controlled (AGC) to maintain the 1
st
IF
output level constant against the big variation of the RF Rx level at the
MSTU input.
SRT 1F
2-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
AGC current of Main 1 channel can be monitored through connector
CN34 on the SCSU shelf for testing and maintenance service.
The Mixer (MIX) converts the 1
st
IF signal down to the QAM signal and
applies it to the QAM Demodulator Modulate (QAM DEM Module).
QAM DEM Module
The QAM DEM Module is composed of the QAM demodulator the
Analog to Digital Converter (A/D), the Demodulator controller (DEM), the
spectrum shaping device and the Transversal Equalizer (TVE) with
Decision Feedback Equalizer (DFE).
The spectrum shaping device shares spectrum shaping function with the
QAM MOD Module of the transmitter side.
The TVE with DFE equalizes waveform distortion caused by multi-path
fading in the baseband time domain. The radio frame baseband clock
signal is recovered from the received IF signal by the QAM DEM
Module.
The output of QAM DEM Module, the radio frame baseband signal and
the clock signal, are sent to the Receive Data Processing (RDP) circuit.
RDP
The first stage of the RDP is the MLCM decoder. Forward error
correction consists in checking redundancy bits contained in the radio
frame. Radio parity (RP) bits before error correction, part of the MLCM
redundancy bits, are detected to monitor the error performance across
the radio section from the modulator to demodulator.
Bit Error Ratio of RP deterioration (BER-ALM) is one of the automatic
USW operation factors. Another automatic operation factor of the USW
is frame synchronization loss (LOF) on the radio frame.
The RFCOH is extracted to regenerate the STM-1 signal.
The RPS function at the receiver end is performed by the USW. The
USW can hitless switch in case of manual operation and most of the
automatic operation caused by ordinary fading.
MSOH and RSOH drop/insert and AU-Pointer rewriting are carried out.
The 8 unipolar signal spreams are converted to an STM-1 CMI signal
and sent to the BSW unit of the SCSU.
The BSW cannot work in hitless, however, it further isolates the channel
to be tested or during system failure.
Figure 2-6 shows the main signal flow on STM-1 Electrical Interface
equipment.
This configuration is used as SE INTF terminal equipment.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-11
Figure 2-6 shows the main signal flow of the STM-1 Electrical Interface
equipment without SD (Space Diversity).

Figure 2-6 - of Main Signal Flow of STM-1
Electrical Interface Terminal

BSW

BSW

BSW
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
DUP
WS R, S
UC(F1)

STM-1
Electrical
In/out
UC(F1)
WS R,S
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
OSSI (X25/Q3)
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU
BRU
NOTE :
SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching
Unit

STM-1 CMI
Main 1 STM-1 CMI
Main 3 STM-1 CMI
Main 2 STM-1 CMI
Prot CH
SRT 1F
2-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.2.3 Space Diversity
As a counter measure to severe propagation path conditions, Space
Diversity (SD) reception is provided as standard supply. Enable or
disable the SD function is to be set through the LCT.
Figure 2-7 shows the diagram of RF/IF section of MSTU applied for SD
reception.

Figure 2-7 - Diagram of Space Diversity Reception
LNA : Low Noise Amplifier
HYB : Hybrid as IF Combiner
IF DADE : Differential Absolute Delay
Equalizer (adjustable)
DELAY EQL : Delay Equalizer (adjustable)
DEM : Demodulator
LOC : Local Oscillator
TX/RX PLO : Phase Locked Loop Oscillator
MOD : Modulator
IFA : IF Amplifier
LNZ : Linearizer
MIX : Mixer as Freq.
Converter
FIL : Filter
AMP : RF Amplifier
EPS : Endless Phase Shifter
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
DUP

From
SD Antenna
To/from Main Antenna
BRU
1st IF
LOC
RF
LOC
TXPLO
RXPL
2nd
IF
EPS
MSTU
Main 1
MIX MIX
MIX
AMP
AMP LNA
MIX
MIX
LNA DELAY
EQL
IF DADE
DEM HYB
MIX MOD IFA LNZ MIX FIL MIX AMP
1st IF
LOC
2nd
IF
EPS
RF
LOC
TXPLO
RXPL
MSTU
Prot
MIX MOD IFA LNZ MIX FIL MIX AMP
MIX MIX
MIX
AMP
AMP LNA
MIX
MIX
LNA DELAY
EQL
IF DADE
DEM HYB
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-13
The MSTU is equipped with two sets of receiver. One receiver (Main
receiver) is connected to the Main antenna (upper) and the other (SD
receiver) is connected to the SD antenna (lower).
Two receiver outputs are combined together after phase
synchronization. Phase synchronization is achieved by controlling the
2
nd
IF local carrier to SD receiver through the Endless Phase Shifter
(EPS).
The combining ratio of two receiver outputs is controlled through
algorithms to optimize transmission performance.
The SD system can improve the Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) up to
2 to 3 dB during the stable propagation condition period, and remarkably
reduce the possibility of outage due to multi-path fading.
2.2.4 MSTU Front Panel
Figure 2-8 shows the front panel of MSTU unit.
Table 2.1 shows the functions of MSTU front panel
Table 2.1 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel
No. Item Function
(1) FAN 4 cooling fans for transmitter.
(2) FAN PWR Power cable connector for cooling fans
(3) POWER ON/OFF DC power supply switch for MSTU unit
(4) TX LO MON Monitor terminal for TX local frequency
(5) 70M IN 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement
(6) REF I/O In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation
OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT.
(7) 70M OUT MN
70M OUT SD
70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD
antenna reception
(8) DADE DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference
(9) D-EQL Delay equalizer for branching network
(10) XPIC OUT
(master)
XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation
Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal
(11) XPIC IN (slave) XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation
(12) INCR
DECR
ITEM No.
Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only)
Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a LCT terminal for maintenance
(13) LED indicator
UNIT/RCI
LINE
Alarm/status indicator :
Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking
Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on
* : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the LCT.
SRT 1F
2-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 2-8 - Front Panel of MSTU unit
70M IN (5)
REF I/O (6)
MN
70M OUT (7)
SD
D-EQL (9)
DADE (8)

ON

OFF
XPIC OUT (10)
XPIC IN (11)
Factory use only.
ITEM No. must be 0
for normal operation.
(12)
INCR
DECR

ITEM No.
UNIT/RCI (13)
LINE
TX F MON
(4)
POWER
ON/OFF
(3)
FAN PWR
(2)
FAN
(1)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-15

2.2.4.1 Top View of MSTU Adapter
RF output/input connectors from/to MSTU unit are located at the top of
each MSTU unit. These connectors are mounted on the MSTU plug-in
adapter as an intermediate device.
Figure 2-9 shows the top view of MSTU adapter.
Figure 2-9 - Top View of MSTU
SRT 1F
2-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
OW/UC/RUC/WS Signal Transmission
In addition to the main signal (STM-1 signal), the SRT 1F system can
also transmit several auxiliary signals.
Some signals are accessible for users utilization through the connectors
in the Connection area on the SCSU. Some signals are exclusively used
by the SRT 1F to control the SRT 1F system itself.
This chapter describes auxiliary signals for users utilization as follows:
Transmitted by STM-1 SOH (Section Overhead)
Two Engineering Orderwires per system
One User Channel per STM-1
One Wayside Traffic per STM-1 (see 3.4 Wayside Traffic)
Transmitted by RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead)
Two User Channels per system
One Wayside Traffic per STM-1
2.2.5 Engineering Orderwire (OW)
The SRT 1F provides two engineering orderwires. One is transmitted by
E1 byte of RSOH (Regenerator Section OH). The other one is
transmitted by E2 byte of MSOH (Multiplex Section OH). Generally, the
orderwire from E1 is used as omnibus, and the orderwire from E2 as
express.
Voice frequency signals of two orderwire from E1 and E2 are
independent and have no mutual communication.
The orderwires interfacing circuit is the SV unit in the SCSU. The SV
unit has two sets of orderwire interface for E1 and E2; 2-wire VF
modular socket for telephone set connection and 4-wire VF circuit for
the connection to/from other equipment.
The SV unit has a common circuit for Dual Tone Multi Frequency
(DTMF) function and LED/Buzzer for station calling.
The RF channel to transmit orderwires is software settable.
Orderwires are RPS (USW) protected.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-17

Figure 2-10 - Signal Flow of Orderwire
2.2.6 User Channel (UC)
A 64 kb/s User Channel (UC) per RF channel is prepared for users data
communication. This user channel is transmitted through byte F1 of the
RSOH.
The user channel interfacing circuit is the multi-pin connector in the
connection area of SCSU.
User Channels are RPS (USW and BSW) protected.

Figure 2-11 - Signal Flow of User Channel (F1)

To/from
Other
Station
MSTU
Main N
MSTU
Main 1
MSTU
Main 2
MSTU
Prot
E1

E2
E1

E2
E1

E2

Software
selection
E1

E2

SV unit
in
SCSU
VF(E1)

VF(E2)
2W
Telephone
set
4W
VF(E1)

VF(E2)
To/from
Other
Equipment

BSW units
in
SCSU
MSTU
Prot
MSTU
Main 1
Prot
Main 1
Main 2
Main N

Main 1
Main 2
Main N
In/Out port
Main 1
Main 2
Main N
To/from
Other
Stations

64 kb/s
SRT 1F
2-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.2.7 Radio User Channel (RUC)
Two Radio User Channels (RUC) per system are provided to transmit
voice frequency signals (VF) or 64 kb/s data for users utilization. The
RUCs are transferred by the Radio Frame Complementary OH.
Two RUC channels are transmitted by the Main 1 and Protection
channel in parallel for duplication. At the receive side, one of the RUC
sets is selected
VF or 64 kb/s digital interface is selectable through the sub-modules on
the SV unit.

Figure 2-12 - Radio User Channel Signal Flow
In/out port

SV unit
in
SCSU

MSTU
Prot

MSTU
Main 1

VF/64 kb/s #2
VF/64 kb/s #1
RUC #1, #2
RUC #1, #2
Main 1
Prot
To/from
Other
Station

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-19
2.2.8 Wayside Traffic (WS)
The SRT 1F system is provided to transmit two Wayside Traffics (WS,
2.048 Mb/s each) per STM-1 for local traffic transfer.
One of two Wayside traffics (WS SOH) is transmitted by the undefined
national usage byte of SOH. Another Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH) is
transmitted by the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead.
The interface circuit of Wayside traffics (WS SOH and WS RFCOH) is
the BSW (Bipolar Switch) unit on the SCSU. Input/output port
connectors are located on the front panel of the BSW unit (for 75 ohms
unbalance), and in the Connection Area of the SCSU (for 120 ohms
balance).
The input/output port interface features hardware set.
Wayside signals are RPS (USW and BSW) protected.

Figure 2-13 - Wayside Traffic Signal Flow
WS (SOH)
WS (RFCOH)
Main N
WS (SOH)
WS (RFCOH)
Main 2
WS (SOH)
WS (RFCOH)
Main 1

BSW

BSW

BSW
Main N
Main 2
Prot
Main 1
To/from
Other
Station

MSTU
Main N

MSTU
Main 2

MSTU
Prot

MSTU
Main 1

SRT 1F
2-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.2.9 Digital Communication Channel (DCC)
Digital Communication Channels (DCCs) are provided for the
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) signal
transmission.
The DCC, is detailed in chapter 2.6.6 Embedded Communication Unit.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-21
2.3 OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System
The SRT 1F uses three kinds of overhead bit to transfer the signals for
system supervise/control and users utilization.
In addition to the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator
Section Overhead (RSOH) of STM-1 frame, the Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is provided between two MSTUs
across a radio section.
Figure 2-14 shows access points of MSOH, RSOH and RFCOH.

Radio Frame Radio Frame
MS MS
Terminal Terminal Back to back terminal
SDH Radio System
RFCOH
RSOH
MSOH
RFCOH
RSOH
MSOH
RFCOH
RSOH
MSOH
MS MS

Figure 2-14

SRT 1F
2-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.3.1 MSOH and RSOH
The Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section
Overhead (RSOH) are compatible with SDH optical fiber systems in
accordance with ITU-T G. 707.
The MSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the multiplex
section.
The RSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the
multiplex/regenerator section.
Figure 2-15 shows the STM-1 frame format and overhead bit
assignment.
Table 2.2 shows the function of MSOH, RSOH, Pointer and Path
Overhead (POH).

RSOH

Pointer

MSOH

Payload

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 WS WS J1
B1 WS WS E1 F1 WS WS B3
D1 WS WS D2 WS D3 WS C2
H1-1 H1-2 H1-3 H2-1 H2-2 H2-3 H3-1 H3-2 H3-3 G1
B2 B2 B2 K1 WS WS K2 WS WS F2
D4 WS WS D5 WS WS D6 WS WS H4
D7 WS WS D8 WS WS D9 WS WS Z3
D10 WS WS D11 WS WS D12 WS WS Z4
S1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 M1 E2 WS

Z5

: Wayside traffic transmission by Radio specific usage byte
and National usage byte
: Reserved for future international standardization
Figure 2-15 - STM-1 Frame Format Construction
270 Bytes
MSOH, RSOH and Pointer
9 Bytes
POH
9 Rows
RSOH
Pointer
MSOH
WS
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-23

Table 2.2 - Main Function of Section Overhead
(ITU-T G.707)
Overhead
Byte
Abbr.
Usage Function
A1, A2 Framing 6 bytes are used for STM-1 frame synchronization.
The pattern is A1A1A1A2A2A2 to each STM-1 frame,
A1 = 11110110, A2 = 00101000
D1 to
D12
Data Communication
Channels
12 bytes are used for Telecommunication Management
Network (TMN).
D1 to D3 are communication for Regenerator Section.
D4 to D12 are communication for Multiplex Section.
J0 Regenerator Section
Trace
One byte is unique number assigned to an STM-1 signal for
identification in aggregated STM-N level.
E1, E2 Orderwire Two bytes are used for voice frequency transmission as
engineering orderwire.
E1 are communication for Regenerator Section.
E2 are communication for Multiplex Section.
F1 User channel One byte is reserved for user purposes.
A User Channel (SOH) is to be transmitted.
B1 BIP-8 Bit Interleaved Parity 8
One byte is used to monitor the error performance of the
Regenerator Section.
B2 BIP-24 Bit Interleaved Parity 24
Three bytes are used to monitor the error performance of
the Multiplex Section.
K1, K2 APS channel Two bytes are allocated for Multiplex Section Protection
(MSP) switching control.
S1 Synchronous status One byte is used for quality control of the synchronous clock
signal.
M1 Far end block error One byte is allocated to transmit the block error information
to the far end.
SOH
Z1, Z2 Spare Four bytes are reserved as spare.
Pointer H1 to H3 Pointer bit Administration Unit (AU) pointer bits are used for Section
Adaptation (SA).

SS bit

Sending side
H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable
Y1 (H1#2) : same as H1
Y2 (H1#3) : same as H1

Receiving side
H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable
Y1 (H1#2) : XX (no use)
Y2 (H1#3) : XX (no use)

Note: H1 is set to the same value for both the sending and
receiving sides.

SRT 1F
2-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.3.2 RFCOH
The SRT 1F organizes the Radio Frame for the transmission between
two Main Signal Transmit Units (MSTU) across a radio section. The
Radio Frame is composed of the STM-1 signal and Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead (RFCOH).
The Radio Frame has two types of configuration based on the
modulation system, 64 QAM and 128 QAM.
64 QAM : 6 streams at 28.512 Mb/s
128 QAM : 7 streams at 24.192 Mb/s
The Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) transfer two
classes of signals and a number of dummy bits. One is exclusively for
internal use to monitor/control the SRT 1F system, and the other is for
users utilization.
Signals for SRT 1F system internal use:
FA : Frame Alignment bit to maintain the frame synchronization of
radio frame (36 bits = 288 kb/s for 64 QAM, 42 bits = 336 kb/s for
128 QAM ).
C1 : Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM)
level 1 (1184 bits = 9472 kb/s for 64 QAM, 1004 bits = 8032 kb/s for
128 QAM).
C2 : Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM)
level 2. Radio parity for the error performance across radio section
before error correction is checked through this signal (296 bits =
2368 kb/s for 64 QAM, 251 bits = 2008 kb/s for 128 QAM).
BSCS (RSC*): Baseband Switch Control Signal to control the Radio
Protection System (RPS) (32 bits = 256 kb/s).
RID1 to RID4 : Route identifier for radio section (4 bits = 32 kb/s).
ATPC : Automatic Transmit Power Control signal (6 bits = 56 kb/s)
1BE/X1BE : Transfer bit for 1 Bit Error (2 bits = 16 kb/s).
FMS/XFMS : Transfer bit for Frequency Measurement
(2 bits = 16 kb/s).
OOS/XOOS : Transfer bit for Out of Service (OOS) (2 bits = 16
kb/s).
Signals for users utilization
WSRF : Wayside traffic by RFCOH (264 bits = 2112 kb/s)
RUC (RSC*) : Radio User Channel (16 bits = 128 kb/s)
Note:
RSC* (Radio Service Channel, 108 bits = 864 kb/s ) is composed of
BSCS, RUC, spare bits and stuff bits for redundant transmission by the
Main 1 and Protection channel only.
Figure 2-16 shows the Radio Frame structure.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-25

RFCOH

S
O
H

Payload

RFCOH (Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead)
and STM-1 frame are mapped
to compose the Radio Frame
as below.

1
st
Sub-frame

2
nd
Sub-frame

S6
S5
S4
S3
S2

Frame
Alignment
Bits
X2 C2 X2 C2 X1 X2 C2 X1 X2 C2
S1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1

Note:
: STM-1 signal (Payload, RSOH, MSOH and Pointer)
C1 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 1
X1 : RSC (BSCS, RUC and dummy bits), FMS/XFMS,
OOS/XOOS and RID1 to RID4
Transmitted by 83
rd
to 148
th
word of each sub-frame.
X2 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH), 1BE/X1BE and ATP
Transmitted by 1
st
to 148
th
word of each sub-frame
Figure 2-16 - Radio Frame Structure of 64 QAM modulation
Total 171.072 Mb/s
STM-1
155.520 Mb/s
15.552
Mb/s
3564 bits (28.512 Mb/s) per
6 bits 6 bits 148 words
1776 bits
148 words
1776 bits
6 bits 83rd to 148th word (792 bits) 1st to 82nd word (984 bits)
1st word (12 bits) 83rd word (12 bits)
S6
to
S1
SRT 1F
2-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

RFCOH

S
O
H

Payload

RFCOH (Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead)
and STM-1 frame are mapped
to compose the Radio Frame
as below.

1
st
Sub-frame

2
nd
Sub-frame

S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2

Frame
Alignment
bits
X2 C2 X2 C2 X1 X2 C2 X1 X2 C2
S1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1

S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2

Frame
Alignment
bits
X2 C2 X2 C2 X1 X2 C2 X1 X2 C2
S1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1

Figure 2-17 - Radio Frame Structure of 128 QAM modulation
Total 169.344 Mb/s
STM-1
155.520 Mb/s
13.824
Mb/s
3024 bits (24.192 Mb/s) per
6 bits 6 bits
125 words
1500 bits
126 words
1512 bits
6 bits
6 bits
36th to 125th word (1080
37th to 126th word (1080
1st to 35th word (420 bits)
1st to 36th word (432 bits)
1st word (12 bits) 37th word (12 bits)
S7
to
S1
1st Sub-frame
2nd Sub-frame
1st word (12 bits) 36th word (12 bits)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-27

Note:
: STM-1 signal (Payload, MSOH, RSOH and Pointer)
X1 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH), RSC (BSCS, RUC and
dummy bits), FMS/XFMS, OOS/XOOS, RID1 to
RID4,1BE/X1BE and ATPC
Transmitted by 37
th
to 126
th
word of the 1
st
sub-frame
and 36
th
to 125
th
word of the 2
nd
sub-frame.
X2 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH).
Transmitted by all words of each sub-frame.

SRT 1F
2-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.4 Radio Protection Switch System
The SRT 1F is equipped with the Radio Protection Switch system (RPS)
to improve signal transmission reliability. Automatic protection switch
intervenes in case of equipment failure and degradation of the
propagation condition. Manual switching is implemented for testing and
maintenance operation purposes.
2.4.1 Outline of Radio Protection Switching
Protection Ratio
One protection channel is provided for each switching group.
Alternated operation : One group (RPS 1 = Group 1) having 7 + 1
protection
Co-channel operation : Two groups (RPS 1 = Group 1 and
RPS 2 = Group 2) having 7 + 1 protection each.
Maximum number of main channels is limited by the frequency band
being utilized (maximum 7 main channels per group).
Switching Device
The Radio Protection System has two switch, bipolar switch (BSW) and
unipolar switch (USW) stages.
Figure 2-18 shows the outline of the Radio Protection System.

Figure 2-18 - Radio Protection System
BB INTF BSW BB INTF BSW
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)

Main 1

Main 2

Main 3

Main 1

Main 2

Main 3
Prot Prot
To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal
To/from Main N
Unipolar signal
To/from Main N
Unipolar signal
BB INTF
: Bipolar signal (CMI) line
: Unipolar signal (19.44 Mb/s X 8) line
: Optional BB INTF unit (OPT INTF)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-29
Switching Section
The switching section of the Radio Protection System consists of two
facing SRT 1F equipment.
Figure 2-19 shows the RPS switching section.

Figure 2-19 - Switching Section
OW/UC/WS Signal
The Radio Protection Switching of Orderwire, User Channel by SOH
and Wayside traffic by SOH/RFCOH depends on the operation of
STM-1 main signal.
Co-channel Operation
In case of Co-channel operation, two independent Radio Protection
Switching groups (RPS 1 and RPS 2) are configured according to the
system requirement.
RPS 1 and RPS 2 operate independently, and there is no mutual
protection switching between two groups.
Human Machine Interface (HMI)
The switching status and manual switch operation are supervised
through the local terminal, LCT. There is no display/control panel
equipped on the SRT 1F.
The LCT

can supervise/control all SRT 1F equipment (NE = Network
Element) within a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) group
connecting the local terminal.
USW
MSTU
MSTU USW USW
MSTU
MSTU USW
USW
MSTU
BSW BSW BSW BSW MSTU USW USW
MSTU
MSTU USW
USW
MSTU
BSW BSW BSW BSW MSTU USW USW
MSTU
MSTU USW
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
Terminal C
Back to back Terminal B
Terminal A
Switching section B to C Switching section A to B
Unipolar
CMI
Unipolar
CMI
Unipolar
CMI
To/from Main N
Unipolar
CMI
To/from Main N To/from Main N
SRT 1F
2-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.4.2 USW and BSW
The Radio Protection System has two switch, bipolar switch (BSW) and
unipolar switch (USW) stages.
USW (Unipolar Switch)
The USW is a part of the digital transmit/receive processor of MSTU.
This switch can hitless switch between protection and any of the main
channels through automatic baseband DADEing. Protection switching
on fade is carried out by this USW. Fading and equipment failure on the
MSTU RF/IF stage are detected as BER ALM or F LOSS at the
receiving end to initiate automatic RPS operation.

Signal level : 8 streams of 19.44 Mb/s, Unipolar
Direction : Uni-directional
Auto revertive
Initiator : Loss of frame alignment (F LOSS)
Signal degrade (BER ALM)

BSW (Bipolar Switch)
One BSW unit per main channel is mounted in the SCSU (Supervisory
Control & Switching Unit). This switch cannot hitless switch because of
the signal level (bipolar) and of the switching device (high-speed
mechanical relay). BSW automatic protection switching is mainly
determined by equipment failure. Manual protection switching is also a
non hitless switching but can safely isolate a specific main channel from
traffic transmission, for testing and troubleshooting purposes.
Signal level : STM-1, CMI (Coded Mark Inversion)
Direction : Bi-directional
Auto revertive
Initiator : MSTU equipment alarm
MSTU line failure alarm
MSTU power supply failure

Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21 shows the function of USW and BSW.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-31

Figure 2-20 - Automatic Operation of USW

Figure 2-21 - Automatic Operation of BSW

Following propagation failure of Main 1 from Terminal B to Terminal A,
USWs (shaded) of one direction from B to A of Main 1 operate as shown
above.
Other switches are not affected at all.
Following equipment failure of Main 1 Terminal A (MSTU receiver),
BSWs (shaded) of both directions B and A of Main 1 operate as shown
above.

USW RX BSW BSW BSW BSW TX USW USW RX TX USW

Propagation failure
USW RX TX USW USW RX TX USW
USW TX BSW BSW BSW BSW RX USW USW TX RX USW
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
Terminal C Terminal A
USW TX RX USW USW TX RX USW

Equipment Failure
USW RX BSW BSW BSW BSW TX USW USW RX TX USW
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
BB
INTF
USW TX RX USW USW TX RX USW
USW TX BSW BSW BSW BSW RX USW USW TX RX USW
USW RX TX USW USW RX TX USW
Terminal A Terminal C
SRT 1F
2-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.4.3 Switching Priority
The following is the priority order of Radio Protection Switching;-
Table 2.3 - Priority Order of RPS Operation
Priority Switching Description
1
st
LOCKOUT Inhibits any type of RPS operation
2
nd
FORCED Switch over to Prot CH unless the specified Main CH or Prot
CH is locked out. (* Not effective in case of Prot CH error)
3
rd
AUTOMATIC The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH is
free and normal.
The priority order of automatic switching is listed below.
4
th
MANUAL The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH by the command
through LCT, if Prot CH is free and normal.
5
th
OCC Occasional traffic transmission (option)
The lowest priority traffic is allowed to be transferred by
Prot CH when Prot CH is free and normal.

Table 2.4 - Priority Order of Automatic Protection Switching
Priority Switching operation
Highest BSW operation of Priority CH (default = Main 1)
BSW operation of the first incoming channel
BSW operation of the second incoming channel
USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of Priority CH (default = Main
1)
USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the first incoming channel
USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the second incoming
channel
USW operation by BER ALM of Priority CH (default = Main 1)
USW operation by BER ALM of the first incoming channel
Lowest USW operation by BER ALM of the second incoming channel

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-33
2.4.4 Switching Initiator and Operation Time
Automatic protection of RPS is initiated by;-
Signal Failure : Frame alignment loss (F LOSS) of the Radio Frame
Signal Degrade: Bit Error Ratio Alarm (BER ALM) of radio parity
before forward error correction.
Signal Failure (F LOSS alarm)
F LOSS alarm is initiated within 3 m seconds after frame
synchronization loss and recovered within 3 m seconds after
establishing synchronization.
Signal Degrade
The threshold level of BER ALM can be set through the LCT. Table 2.5
shows the setting position and time to initiate/recover of BER ALM.
Default setting is 2 .
Table 2.5 - BER ALM Initiation Setting and Time to Initiate/Restore
Setting
BER ALM
Initiation before
Error correction
BER after
Error
correction
Time to
Initiate
(maximum)
ALM
Restoration
before
Error
correction
Time to
Restore
(average)
2 1 X 10
3
5 X 10
-7
0.25 ms 6 X 10
-5
4 ms
3 5 X 10
4
6 X 10
-8
0.5 ms 3 X 10
-5
8 ms
4 1 X 10
4
3 X 10
-10
2.5 ms 6 X 10
-6
40 ms
5 5 X 10
5
4 X 10
-11
5.0 ms 3 X 10
-6
80 ms
6 1 X 10
5
1 X 10
-12
less 25.0 ms 6 X 10
-7
400 ms
7 5 X 10
6
1 X 10
-12
less 50.0 ms 3 X 10
-7
800 ms
8 1 X 10
6
1 X 10
-12
less 250.0 ms 6 X 10
-8
4000 ms

Switching Time
Without occasional traffic: Less than 5 ms plus BER ALM detecting time
and control signal propagation time.
With occasional traffic: Less than 9.5 ms plus BER ALM detecting time
and control signal propagation time.
DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer)
Automatic DADE ( 3 bits) functions to automatically synchronizes two
baseband signals transmitted by a Main CH and Prot CH when having to
carry out protection switching.
Manual DADE (0 to 31 bits): compensates the baseband signal path
difference between each Main CH and Prot CH.
SRT 1F
2-34 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Wait to Restore (WTR, option setting)
Delay time from the detection of BER ALM restoration up to releasing
protection switching is available to eliminate unnecessary RPS operation
when the propagation condition is unstable.
If other channels fail during the WTR period, the WTR will be canceled
immediately and Prot CH is taken over by the newly failed channel.
2.4.5 Occasional Traffic (option)
The lowest priority traffic can be transmitted by Prot CH when all
channels are normal. If a channel fails, the occasional traffic will be
immediately disconnected to remove traffic from the main failed
channel.
Extra OCC INTF and OPT INTF unit are required for occasional traffic
transmission.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-35
2.5 Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU)
The SRT 1F equipment is equipped with a Supervisory, Control &
Switching Unit (SCSU) for each switching group.
The main function of SCSU is:
Interfacing the STM-1, Orderwire, User Channel, Wayside and
Digital Communication Channel.
Interfacing the Local Terminal and Network Management System.
Interfacing the External Timing Clock Source.
Perform Radio Protection Switching (RPS) at bipolar (CMI) level.
Retrieve/register alarm/status data for protection control and
indication.
Retrieve/register Performance Monitoring data.
Control the Radio Protection Switching System at bipolar and
unipolar signal level.
Control the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP for STM-1 MS optical
interface only).
Provide Orderwire functions.
Administrate the Timing Clock Synchronization.
Relay Housekeeping (External) supervisory/control signal.
Register the NE setting (provisioning) data.
The SCSU is composed of following units:
BSW : Bipolar Switch unit for each main channel
SV : Supervisory unit
TCU
(1)
: Timing Control Unit
HK
(2)
: Housekeeping unit
ECU
(3)
: Embedded Communication Unit
OCC INTF
(4)
: Occasional Traffic Interface unit
BSW INTF
(5)
: Baseband Switch Interface unit
Note: (1) : Card protection (X and Y) is available as option.
(2) : Option, maximum 2 units can be installed.
(3) : Option, maximum 2 units can be installed.
(4) : Option, one unit will be installed for occasional traffic
use.
The unit should be insert in the slot next to the BSW of the
last working channel.
(5) : Option, one unit will be installed for RPS 2 (Group 2)
control

Figure 2-22 shows the functional block diagram of SCSU.
SRT 1F
2-36 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 2-22 - Diagram of SCSU Function

SV sub-unit
for RPS 2
OW
VF/DGTL
M 1
M 2
M n

BBC

BB MSP SW
BBIU

TCU
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK OUT

HK*
HK IN/OUT
HK ALARM IN
HK CONTROL
OUT

ECU*
DCC IN/OUT
DCC IN
DCC OUT
To/from RPS 2
SV unit
Radio UC X 2
OW (2W VF) X 2
OW (4W VF) X 2
BSW units
Prot
M 1
M 2
M n
MSTU units
STM-1 CMI
WS X 2
UC X 1
Main 1 to n
To/from STM-1 CMI
In/out of BSW
To/from all MSTUs
To/from all MSTUs
To/from Prot & M1
SCSU
Main 1 to n
OPT in/out

E1,E2
* Note:
HK and ECU are option
LCT
LAN/X25
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-37
2.5.1 Signal Interface
STM-1 Electrical Interface and Wayside traffic 75 ohms unbalanced
connectors are located on the front panel of the BSW unit. 120 ohms
balanced connectors for Wayside traffic and other signals are located in
the Connection Area of SCSU.
Interface connector pin assignment is shown in par. 3. Installation of
this manual.
2.5.2 Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit
A Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit is provided for each main channel. The
STM-1 Electrical (CMI) signals to/from other equipment are interfaced
through this BSW unit. In case of Optical interface, the signals
converted to STM-1 CMI signal by the BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit,
optional) interface this BSW unit.
The BSW unit simultaneously switches the following signals:
An STM-1 CMI signal
Wayside Traffics (SOH and RFCOH), a User Channel (SOH)
The bipolar switch operation is not hitless and produces some data loss,
however, it safely isolates the channel.
2.5.3 Supervisory (SV) unit
An SV unit is provided for each SRT 1F equipment to supervise/control
the Radio Protection system.
To control two RPS groups (RPS 1= group 1 and RPS 2 = group 2), the
SV unit must be equipped with a sub-unit for RPS 2 control.
The main function of SV unit is:
Terminate Orderwires, User Channels and DCCs.
Interface the Local Terminal, Network Management System (X.25)
and ethernet.
Retrieve/register alarm/status data for protection control and
indication.
Retrieve/register Performance Monitoring data.
Control the RPS at bipolar and unipolar signal level.
Control the MSP (for STM-1 MS optical interface only).
Provide Orderwire functions.
Register the NE setting (provisioning) data.
Relay Housekeeping (8 item input and 4 item output)
Figure 2-23 shows LEDs switches and connectors of SV unit.
SRT 1F
2-38 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 2-23 - Front View of SV unit
D-sub 9 (f)
LED Indicator
Modular Jack
Push SW
Dip switch
ACS/SWDL
MISC
LINE
UNIT/RCI
BACK UP
NORM
CR/MJ/RCI
MN/WR
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
ACO SW
LED TEST

LAN
X25/BTB
2W
E1
2W
E2

S
V

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-39
Table 2.6a - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (1/3)
LED Indication
Group LED Color Status Description
Steady on Unit failure of SV unit
Log memory threshold crossed
Red
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of SV unit
UNIT/RCI
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of SV unit
Red Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure LINE
Green (Y) Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal
MISC Red Steady on Housekeeping alarm (DI) on
Green (Y) Steady on NE is logged on by user
Red Steady on Mismatch of software version
ACS/SWDL
Yellow (G) Blinking Software download is on progress
Indication
for
SV unit
BACK UP Yellow (G) Steady on Back up of setting data is on progress
NORM Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of NE
Steady on CR/MJ alarm of any unit in NE CR/MJ/RCI Red
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in
NE
MN/WR Red Steady on MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
MAINT Yellow (G) Steady on Maintenance condition of NE
Red Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than
WR
CARD OUT
Yellow (G) Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious
than WR
Indication
for
NE
ACO Yellow (G) Steady on Alarm cut off of NE
CALL E1 Green (Y) Blinking E1 orderwire is being called Orderwire
CALL E2 Green (Y) Blinking E2 orderwire is being called
Note : Green (Y)
Yellow (G)
= Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1.
= Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.
SRT 1F
2-40 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Table 2.6b - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (2/3)
Switch Control
Switch Part No. Type Description
ACO SW SW A2 Push Alarm cut off
LED TEST SW A3 Push LED test
SV CPU TEST SW B2 Push Factory use
UL RESET SW A1 Push Factory use
------ SW A1 Dip Factory use

Tablr 2.6c - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (3/3)
Connector Function
Connector Part No. Type Description
E1-2W CN 17 Modular E1 orderwire 2-wire telephone
E2-2W CN 18 Modular E2 orderwire 2-wire telephone
CN 71 Multi-pin LCT (Local Terminal) connector
LAN CN 91 Modular LAN connector
------ CN 41 Multi-pin Factory use
LED Indication
The SV unit displays indicate a summary of the alarms/status conditions
on the SRT 1F equipment (NE) as shown on the
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-41
Table 2.6. Detailed LED indications are available on each unit.
Orderwire Function
Two fully independent orderwires, E1 and E2 are provided.
To use an orderwire, connect an ordinary 2-wire telephone set to E1-2W
or E2-2W modular jack. The station is selectively called through the
telephone key-pad.
Individual station call: Press #, Group No., Station No.
Station group call: Press #, Group No., * * ( 2 asterisks)
4-wire VF in/out ports are provided for the connection to/from other
equipment.
Housekeeping (HK)
8 items of HK alarm input and 4 items of HK control output are available
as standard supply.
Digital Communication Channel (DCC)
A DCC line can be transmitted by the Main 1 channel and Protection
channel.
SRT 1F
2-42 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.5.4 Timing Control Unit (TCU)
A Timing Control Unit (TCU) is provided for each SRT 1F equipment.
The Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) provides an extra
slot and automatic/manual switching facilities for TCU unit protection (X
and Y) as option.
The TCU accepts the synchronization timing clock signal from three (3)
STM-1 lines and/or two (2) external clock inputs (2.048 MHz or 2.048
Mb/s), then regenerates the clock signal to supply to the NE and
external clock output port.
The TCU generates the clock signal internally (Holdover mode and
Internal mode) in case of signal source input loss.
For detailed application, see 2.8.2 Synchronization.
2.5.5 Housekeeping (HK) unit
The SV unit can accommodate 8 items of Housekeeping (HK) input and
4 items of HK output.
To increase Housekeeping (HK) in/out items, a maximum of two HK
units can be installed as option.
Number of item HK input (DI) HK output (DO)
SV unit only 8 4
SV unit + HK 1 40 20
SV unit + HK 1 + HK 2 72 36

Figure 2-24 - Housekeeping in/out (DI/DO) Interface
SRT 1F
equipment
Other equipment
Housekeeping output (DO)
Housekeeping input (DI)
Photo
coupler
L
-48 V (-38.4 to 57.6
V)
0.3 mA to 11.3 mA
6.4 k
L
L
Relay
Max. I = 100 mA
Max. V = DC 110 V
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-43
2.5.6 Embedded Communication Unit (ECU) (option)
The SV unit terminates a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) by
using Main 1 channel.
To increase the number of DCC lines, a maximum of two ECU units can
be installed as option, the ECU 1 for RPS group 1 and the ECU 2 for
group 2.
An ECU terminates maximum 8 DCC lines.

Figure 2-25 - Configuration of DCC Lines with ECU
2.5.7 Occasional Interface (OCC INTF) unit (option)
An OCC INTF unit will be installed for optional occasional traffic
transmission through the protection channel.
The OCC INTF provides STM-1 CMI interface and should be insert in
the slot next to the BSW of the last working channel.
For example, in the system type 3+1 the OCC INTF should be equipped
in the slot W4-BSW.
The OCC INTF slot will be used in the fully equipped system type (7+1)
only.

MSTU
(RPS 1 - M1) SV unit

ECU 1
unit

ECU 2
unit
MSTU
(RPS 1 - M2)
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7

MSTU
(RPS 2 - M1)
RSDCC (Radio)
RSDCC (Line)
MSDCC (Line)
RSDCC (Line) Max. 6
GP1 - M n (n is selectable)
RSDCC (Radio)
RSDCC (Line) Max. 7
Prot
SRT 1F
2-44 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.5.8 Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit (option)
A BSW INTF unit will be installed on the 2
nd
SCSU to control the BSW
units of the RPS 2 group.
The BSW INTF relays control command and response signals between
the SV unit on the 1
st
SCSU, and the BSW units on the 2
nd
SCSU.
2.6 Baseband Interface Unit (BBIU)
The STM-1 Electrical interface (SE INTF) is the standard baseband
interface of the SRT 1F equipment. The equipment is composed of a
BRU (Branching Network Unit), MSTUs (Main Signal Transmission Unit)
and a SCSU (Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit).
The BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit) is optionally available for other type
of interface, OPT INTF MS/RS (Optical Interface for Multiplex Section
and Regenerator Section).
The main function of the BBIU is to:
Provide STM-1 Optical baseband interfacing.
Perform the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) for OPT INTF (MS).

The BBIU is composed of following units:
OPT INTF 1 ** : Optical Interface 1 for 0 to 15 Km

*
OPT INTF 2 ** : Optical Interface 2 for 15 to 40 Km
MSPSW : Multiplex Section Protection Switch for OPT INTF
BBC : BBIU Controller
[Note]
*
: An applicable baseband unit should be selected for
each channel.
Any combination of different types of interface cannot
be configured.
** : Type of OPT INTF must be selected according to fiber
optic length. See Table 2.7.
2.6.1 Optical Interface (OPT INTF) unit
The main function of OPT INTF is to:
Convert the STM-1 signal from optical to electrical (CMI) and
electrical to optical.
Drop/insert Orderwires, a User Channel and Digital Communication
Channels (*).
Drop/insert Section Overhead (SOH); B1,B2, J0, K1, K2, S1 and
SSMB (*).
AU-4 pointer processing for radio section(*).
Check Frame alignment of the STM-1 signal (*).
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-45
Descramble/scramble the STM-1 signal (*).
Recover/retime clock synchronization (*).
Provide baseband loop back on the line and radio sides (*).
Note: * marked functions of MSTU are canceled if the BBIU is installed.
Two types of OPT INTF are provided according to fiber optic length.
Table 2.7 shows the characteristics of each OPT INTF unit.
Table 2.7 - Characteristics of OPT INTF
Unit OPT INTF 1 OPT INTF 2
Application code (ITU-T G.957) S-1.1 L-1.1
Typical hop 0 - 15 Km 15 - 40 Km
Operation wavelength range (nm) 1260 - 1360 1280 1335
Transmitter at reference point S
Source type MLM MLM
Special characteristics
- Maximum RMS width (nm) 7.7 4.0
- Maximum -20 dB width (nm) - -
- Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) - -
Mean launched power
- Maximum (dBm) -8 0
- Minimum (dBm) -15 -5
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10
Optical path between S and R
Attenuation range (dB) 0 -12 10 28
Maximum dispersion (ps/nm) 96 185
Minimum optical return loss of cable point at S, including
connectors (dB)
NA NA
Maximum discrete reflectance between S & R (dB) NA NA
Receiving at reference point R
Minimum sensitivity (dBm) -28 -34
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -10
Maximum optical path penalty including chirp and
dispersion (dB)
1 1
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R (dB) NA NA
Connector SC type or FC type
Bit rate STM-1 : 155.520 Mb/s 20 ppm
ITU-T Recommendation Reference ITU-T G.957 Table 2 and G.703
SRT 1F
2-46 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
The baseband signal converted to STM-1 CMI is applied to the Bipolar
Switch (BSW) unit of SCSU via the MSPSW unit.
Figure 2-27 shows the diagram of the Optical Interface terminal without
MSP.
Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)
To increase the reliability of the fiber optic line, the Multiplex Section
Protection (MSP) on the line side is provided as option.
Figure 2-26 shows the functional diagram of MSP.

Figure 2-26 - Function of Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)
Features of MSP operation are as follows:
Protection ratio : 1 + 1
Signal level : STM-1 Electrical unipolar by IC gate
Operation mode : Bi-directional/uni-directional (selectable)
Non revertive
Initiator : Signal Fail (SF)
- Loss of STM-1 frame synchronization
- Loss of optical signal input
- Multiplex section AIS
Signal Degrade (SD)
- BER : 10
-3
(SF or SD), 10
-5
to 10
-9

- PM : STEP (SD or SF)
FESP, TESP, FSEP, TSEP
K1 control signal from the far end station
Switching time : Less than 50 ms plus alarm detection time
Priority order : Lockout > Forced > Auto (SF) > Auto (SD)
> Manual
Lock-in parameter : Switching count, Monitor time, Hold time
SRT 1F Radio Terminal (OPT INTF MSP) SDH Optical Terminal

INTF

OPT INTF (X)

DSTR

OPT INTF (Y)

INTF

SEL
SEL
DSTR
MSPSW

MSTU

BSW
Line X
Line Y
STM-1 CMI
input
STM-1 CMI
output
STM-1
Optical line

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-47

Note:
BER : Bit Error Ratio
PM : Performance Monitor
- STEP : Short Term Performance
Continuing period of Loss of frame or Severely
errored second
- FESP : 15 minutes Errored Second Performance
- TESP : 24 hours Errored Second Performance
- FSEP : 15 minutes Severely Errored Second
Performance
- TSEP : 24 hours Severely Errored Second Performance
Switching count : The number of MSP operation to start Lock-in
during the Monitor time.
Monitor time : The period to monitor Switching count to start
Lock-in.
Hold time : The duration from start to end of Lock-in
condition.

Figure 2-28 shows the diagram of Optical Interface terminal with MSP.

SRT 1F
2-48 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.6.2 MSP SW and BBC
MSP SW
A Multiplex Section Protection Switch (MSPSW) unit is to be provided
for each main channel.
The MSPSW unit is a protection switching device for the OPT INTF
(with MSP) terminal. The MSPSW unit functions as interface of the
STM-1 electrical (CMI) signal between a BB INTF (OPT INTF
with/without MSP) and a Bipolar Switch (BSW) of SCSU.
BBC
One BBIU Controller (BBC) unit is equipped on each BBIU. The BBC
controls the MSPSW units following the control command from the
Supervisory (SV) unit of the SCSU.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-49
Figure 2-27 shows the schematic diagram of the STM-1 Optical
Interface Terminal without MSP and SD.

Optical Interface Terminal without MSP
OPT
INTF

MSP
SW
OPT
INTF

MSP
SW
BBC
OPT
INTF

MSP
SW

BSW

BSW

BSW
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
DUP
WS R,S

WS R,S

WS R,S

UC(F1)

UC(F1)

UC(F1)
STM-1
Optical
In/out
Main 1

Main 2

Main 3

STM-1 CMI STM-1 Unipolar
UC(F1)
WS R,S
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
OSSI (X25/Q3)
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU
BBIU
BRU
NOTE :

STM-1 CMI
STM-1 CMI
STM-1 CMI
STM-1 CMI
Prot CH
SRT 1F
2-50 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Figure 2-28 shows the schematic diagram of the STM-1 Optical
Interface Terminal with MSP and without SD.

Optical Interface Terminal with MSP

BSW

BSW

BSW
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
USW TDP
USW RDP
MOD TX
DEM RX
MSTU
DUP
STM-1
Optical
In/out
X
Main 1
Y
X
Main 2
Y
X
Main 3
Y
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
OSSI (X25/Q3)
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU
BBIU
BRU
NOTE :

STM-1 CMI Prot CH
STM-1
STM-1
STM-1
STM-1 CMI STM-1 Unipolar
UC(F1)
WS R,S

MSP
SW
OPT
INTF
OPT
INTF
WS R,S

MSP
SW
OPT
INTF
OPT
INTF
WS R,S

MSP
SW
OPT
INTF
BBC
OPT
INTF
WS R,S

UC(F1)

UC(F1)

UC(F1)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-51

2.7 Applications
2.7.1 Co-Channel Operation
The Co-channel frequency operation system can simultaneously
transmit two STM-1 signals over the same RF frequency carrier using
dual polarization, horizontal and vertical. While the alternated operation
can transmit only one STM-1 signal per RF frequency. This system can
double the spectrum efficiency. The transmission capacity of Way side,
User channel and other auxiliary signals will be also doubled.
For the Co-channel operation, the SRT 1F equipment needs the
following options:
An XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceler) module to be
installed on the MSTU (Main Signal Transmit Unit).
Rx local oscillators running in synchronism.
Cross Polarization Interference Canceler (XPIC)
The XPIC is provided to improve the interference distortion caused by
cross polarization interference between V-polarization and H-
polarization.
For the Co-channel operation, a high Cross Polarization Discrimination
(XPD) antenna is used. However, cross polarization interference cannot
be compensated only by a high XPD antenna. In addition to a high XPD
antenna, a Cross Polarization Interference Canceler is provided.
The XPIC is an adaptive cancellation circuit.
Two receivers with the same radio frequency receive the combination
desired of signal and interference signal components (a part of
orthogonal polarization signal). Each of the two Receivers extract their
relevant interference signal. The received interference component is
removed from the received signal after adaptive amplitude/phase
adjustment.
Cross cable connections from each XPIC OUT to XPIC IN are required.
Figure 2-29 shows the functional diagram of XPIC.
Figure 2-30 shows the cross cable connection of MSTUs.
Receive Local Carrier Oscillator
Two receivers with the same frequency shall be supplied with local
synchronized carrier signals.
A cable connection to/from the REF I/O of two MSTUs is required.
The baseband clock signals are reciprocally synchronized through
software setting.
Route ID
Different route Ids for radio section shall be set for proper signal
identification between V-polarization and H-polarization.
SRT 1F
2-52 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Master/Slave setting
Master/Slave setting on the MSTU is carried out through the LCT.

Figure 2-29 - Functional Diagram of XPIC

Figure 2-30 - Cross Cable Connection of MSTUs for Co-channel Operation
REF I/O (RF
LOC)
XPIC IN (70 MHz)
XPIC OUT (70 MHz)
Desired signal
Transmitter X
Transmitter Y
Interference
Desired signal
Receiver X
XPIC
XPIC
Receiver Y
LOC LOC
LOC LOC
IF LOC

IF LOC
RF LOC XPIC IN
XPIC OUT
70 MHz
REF I/O
XPIC OUT
70 MHz
REF I/O

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-53
2.7.2 Synchronization
The SRT 1F system shall be synchronized to the reference clock source
of the network. The SRT 1F equipment clock signal is supplied through
the TCU (Timing Clock Unit) of the SCSU (Supervise, Control and
Switching Unit).
2.7.2.1 Synchronization Source
The SRT 1F can accept one of three kinds of signals as its
synchronization clock source.
Incoming STM-1 Signal (LINE) to TCU, maximum 3 inputs
From STM-1 line input (Line side)
From MSTU receiver output (Radio side)
External Clock Input (EXT) to TCU, maximum 2 inputs
2.048 MHz or
2.048 Mb/s
Input connectors are located in the Connection Area of the SCSU.
TCU Oscillator
Holdover mode: In case of synchronization reference source loss,
the TCU generates the clock signal in accordance with the data
present just before the interruption.
Internal mode: Free-running self oscillation.
If TCU fails, MSTU generates the internal free-running clock signal.
SRT 1F
2-54 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.7.2.2 Synchronization Mode
The SRT 1F has two Synchronization Mode options.
Mode 1
The SRT 1F does not directly output to the Synchronous Source Unit
(SSU). The SRT 1F receives the reference clock source from other
equipment through the STM-1 signal input (LINE) or EXT CLK input
connectors (EXT). The SRT 1F is generally operated in this mode.
Mode 2
The SRT 1F directly outputs to the Synchronous Source Unit (SSU). For
Equipment Clock (EC) source, the external clock from the SSU is
basically the first choice.
Figure 2-31 shows Synchronization modes.
SSU: Synchronous Source Unit
High quality reference clock source equipment to generate/regenerate
the primary/secondary clock signal of the network in accordance with
ITU-U Rec. G.813.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-55

a - Diagram of Synchronization Mode 1

b - Diagram of Synchronization Mode 2
Figure 2-31 Diagram of Synchronization
PLL
TCU
T0
EQPT Clock supply
to SRT 1F Equipment
2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
EQPT CLK Output
to other Equipment

EC Selection (Max. 3)
to be selected according
to Quality (SSMB) &
Priority
Ext 2M CLK (X)
(Y)
Line CLK PRI 1
PRI 2
PRI 3
INT CLK

EQPT CLK Output
to other Equipment
LC Selection (Max. 3)
to Quality (SSMB) &
Priority
T4
PLL
EC Selection (Max. 2)
to Quality (SSMB) &
Priority
T0
TCU
Line CLK PRI 1
PRI 2
PRI 3
INT CLK
Ext 2M CLK (X)
(Y)
EQPT Clock supply
to SRT 1F Equipment
EQPT CLK Output
to other Equipment
SSU
2 Mb/s or
2 MHz
2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
SRT 1F
2-56 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.7.2.3 Clock Mode
Two clock modes are available for TCU setting, the TCU mode and the
THROUGH mode.
TCU mode
On the down stream (from the primary station to the end station), the
equipment clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary
station. On the up stream (from the end station to the primary station),
the clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary station
on the down stream.
THROUGH mode
On the down stream, the equipment clock synchronizes to the signal
incoming from primary station. On the up stream, the clock synchronizes
to the signal incoming from the end station.

Figure 2-32 - Clock Mode of TCU
2.7.2.4 Quality Level (S1 byte)
The quality level of the synchronization source is defined by the S1 byte
of RSOH. The TCU selects best quality source as reference.
Table 2.8 - S1 byte code and Quality level
S1 byte
Quality
Level
bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8
Quality description
2 0 0 1 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 811 (Best quality)
3 0 1 0 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 transit
4 1 0 0 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 local
5 1 0 1 1 TCU internal clock
6 0 0 0 0 Quality unknown
6 1 1 1 1 Do not use for synchronization

TCU TCU

SRT 1F

SRT 1F
End
station
Primary
station
Up stream
THROUGH mode TCU mode
Down stream
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-57
2.7.2.5 Line Clock Priority
Generally, the SRT 1F receives the reference clock from the incoming
STM-1 signal. The SRT 1F facing the end station accepts the source
from the Line side (Access ID = GP1-Wn-L, n= Main channel number),
input to BSW unit. The SRT 1F facing the master station accepts the
source from the Radio side (Access ID = GP1-Wn-R), the output of
MSTU receiver.
Figure 2-33 shows an example of line clock selection of the SDH radio
system.

Figure 2-33 - Example of Line Clock Selection

SRT
1F
MUX MUX SRT
1F
MUX SRT
1F
SRT
1F
End
station
Master
station
Line side
GP1-Wn-L
Line side
GP1-Wn-L
Radio side
GP1-Wn-R
Radio side
GP1-Wn-R
Note: n = Main channel number
Normally, Main 1 (n = 1) shall be selected
as Priority 1 (PRI 1)
SRT 1F
2-58 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
2.7.3 Orderwire Applications
2.7.3.1 Orderwire Extension
The SRT 1F provides two modular jacks for orderwire telephone
connection, E1 and E2. In addition, 4-wire VF terminals of E1 and E2
are provided for connection to external equipment.
Signal 4-wire Voice Frequency
Impedance 600 ohms balanced
Input Level Standard -4.0 dBr
-16.0 to -0.5 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step
Output Level Standard -4.0 dBr
-8.5 to +7.0 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step
Maximum Output Level +3.17 dBm0 for -law
+3.14 dBm0 for A-law

2.7.3.2 Digital-Through
At repeater stations and back to back stations, orderwires can be
forwarded as digital signal level when telephone sets are on-hook or not
connected. When one of the telephone sets (E1 or E2) is off-hooked,
both the E1 and E2 line are terminated and converted to the voice
frequency level.
Digital through function is provided to minimize the degradation of
orderwires due to analog/digital conversion and noise/distortion intrusion
at the analog signal level.
2.7.3.3 Ring Protection
In case of ring network configuration, the orderwire lines establish a loop
circuit. This loop circuit may cause the orderwire signal to self oscillate
(hauling). To prevent hauling, a port of the orderwire circuit shall be
disconnected at the master station.
If any section of the loop was interrupted by line failure, the orderwire
ring protection automatically reconnects the loop in order to recover the
orderwire communication.
Figure 2-34 shows the function of Orderwire Ring Protection.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 2-59

Figure 2-34 - Ring Protection

Master station
Line failure
These ports are reconnected to
recover the orderwire circuit.
These ports are disconnected
to stop hauling.
In Case of Line Failure
With Ring Protection
With Ring Protection Without Ring Protection

Master station
Master station
VF circuit
VF circuit VF circuit
SRT 1F
2-60 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-1
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Installation preliminaries
In this chapter are described the SRT 1F rack installation procedures.
Specifically:
Storage
Preparation for unpacking
Unpacking procedure
3.1.1 Storage, Unpacking and Inspection
This procedure describes the unpacking and inspection of the SRT 1F
equipment. It assumes that all equipment has been received and that all
data forms and job engineering drawings have been completed and are
available.
3.1.1.1 Storage
When the equipment is to be kept in storage, leave the equipment in the
shipping containers. Store slide-in units in the special bags the units
were originally shipped in.
The bags are coated with a conductive material and will protect the
slide-in units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Figure 3-1 shows examples of ESD warning labels.

Figure 3-1 - Electrostatic Discharge Warning Labels
After unloading the containers, check the contents against the invoice
sheet. Check containers for external damage, quantity and contents.
If any defects or errors are found, immediately contact the person in
charge for proper remedy.
Do not leave the containers outdoors. Store the containers in a place
provided with adequate roof cover which will protect the containers from
rain and dust. Keep the containers in a dry place.
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.1.1.2 Preparation
The unpacking site shall be protected from rain, water, dust etc.
Prepare sufficient space for the unpacking site.
Prepare the tools for the unpacking of the containers.
The quantity of the equipment and installation materials should be
checked while unpacking
3.1.1.3 Unpacking and Inspection
Before unpacking the equipment, inspect the containers for any signs of
damage that may have occurred during shipment. File any claims for
shipping damage with the transportation company according to their
published procedure.
When unpacking the equipment, use the packing list that accompanies
each shipment to determine that all items are present before continuing
with the installation.
Notify the nearest Siemens representative if there is a shortage of any
kind.
3.1.1.4 General Unpacking Method
1. Cut the straps that hold the cover on the container.
2. Open the cover and pull out the sealed polythene bag.
3. Cut immediately under the seal with scissors or a knife.
4. Remove the equipment from the pack by gripping the protectors
attached to the equipment.
5. Immediately check the contents, according to the invoice sheets.
6. Check if the component and parts have been damaged.
7. Notify the nearest Siemens representative if there is damage of any
kind.
3.1.2 Storage of Spare Units
Spare units are separately packed from other main frame units. These
units should be kept in clean places avoiding high temperature and high
humidity.
These units are stored in the special bags which are coated with a
conductive material and will protect spare units from damage by
electrostatic discharge (ESD). See Figure 3-1, for indication markings.
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-3
3.1.3 Accessories
There are two kinds of accessories.
Installation, such as connector plugs or connector assembly,
Maintenance, according to the routine maintenance plan,
maintenance accessories should be stored in the maintenance area.
3.2 Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers
3.2.1 Warning and General Handling
This procedure lists precautionary measures which must be followed
when dealing with optical fibers and optical fiber components.
3.2.1.1 Tools Required
No tools are required for this procedure.
3.2.1.2 Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing,
using or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure
the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment.
WARNING
Never look into the end of an optical cable or fibre pigtail.
PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser
radiation is present.
Never handle exposed fibre with bare hands or permit contact with
the body. Fibre fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect
and remove.
Figure 3-2 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser
emitting and receiving units:

Figure 3-2 - Laser Warning Labels
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.2.1.3 Storage
1. Protective caps are provided with the optical connectors of the
optical cable (see Figure 3-3).
2. Do not expose the optical cables to direct sunlight. The
recommended storage temperature is 10 to 60C (14 to 140F),
and the maximum recommended relative humidity is 90%.

Figure 3-3 - Protective Cap (SC/PC Connector)
3.2.1.4 Handling
1. Do not pull the optical cable when the connector is attached to the
optical unit (see Figure 3-4).

Figure 3-4 - Optical Cable Pulling
2. Take care not to bend or obstruct the optical cable (see Figure 3-5).

Figure 3-5 - Optical Cable Bending and Obstruction Limits
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-5
3. Do not bend the optical cable at a radius of less than 50 mm (see
Figure 3-6).

Figure 3-6 - Optical Cable Minimum Bending Radius
4. Do not twist the optical cable more than 360 per meter of length
(see Figure 3-7).

Figure 3-7 - Optical Cable Twist Limits
5. Do not drop or step on the optical cable and do not subject it to
excessive vibration (see Figure 3-8).

Figure 3-8 - Optical Cable Vibration and Shock Damage
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.2.2 Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables
This procedure details the precautions which must be taken to preserve
the integrity of optical connectors and cables during connection and
disconnection.
No tools are required for this procedure.
3.2.2.2 Preparation
1. Verify that there are no serious defects in the optical cables and
connectors.
2. Clean the optical fibre end surface with a cotton swab soaked in
alcohol.
3.2.2.3 Connection Procedure
1. While holding the connector body, insert the connector. Ensure the
connector key engages.
3.2.2.4 Disconnection Procedure
1. Gently pull the connector body away from the optical coupling
interface. Be careful not to pull or bend the optical cable.
2. Place a protective cap over the optical cable connector
3.2.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors
This section provides procedures for the cleaning of optical fibre cables
and connectors.
The tools required are:
Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit (CLETOP Reel Type A)
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available use:
Pure alcohol
Mediswabs
Lens Cleaning Paper
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-7
3.2.3.2 Procedure
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is available:
1. Insert the connector into the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit.
2. Twist the connector back and forth.
3. Slide the connector down the slot in the cleaning kit.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 in the other slot of the cleaning kit.
5. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in par.
3.2.4.
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available:
1. Use a Mediswab dampened with alcohol to clean the end of the fibre
connector.
2. Allow the connector to air dry.
3. Wipe the end of the connector with lens cleaning paper.
4. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in the
following point, Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors.
3.2.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors
3.2.4.1 Connector End-face Definitions
The condition of the connector end-face is a significant factor for the
long-term operation of the network. This procedure defines the
requirements for the inspection of terminated optical fibres.
3.2.4.2 End-face Zone Definitions
The connector end-face is divided into the following regions:
core
cladding
For inspection purposes the cladding region is divided into internal and
external areas. See Figure 3-9.
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 3-9 - Connector End-face

3.2.4.3 Defect Definitions
The following definitions apply:
a scratch defect is a linear extended surface mark
a pit defect is a localised surface mark
a crack defect is a stress fracture either wholly within the fibre or
intersecting the fibre surface
a chip defect has material broken away from the fibre following the
generation of crack defects
3.2.4.4 Scratch and Pit Defects
The core region must be free from blemishes.
Ferrule Area
Internal Cladding area
=62.5 m
External Cladding area
=125 m
Adhesive Bond
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-9
3.2.4.5 Chip Defects
The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from
defects, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the
surface.
The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for
more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the
fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Figure 3-10 for acceptance
criteria.

Figure 3-10 - Chip Defects
Acceptable:
Chip in outer cladding
area only
External cladding area
Internal cladding area
Unacceptable:
Chip extends into
inner cladding area
Acceptable:
Chip in outer cladding
area only
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.2.4.6 Crack Defects
The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from
defects, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the
surface. The outer cladding region should be free from defects that
extend for more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws
within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface.
See Figure 3-11 for acceptance criteria.

Figure 3-11 - Crack Defects
Acceptable:
Crack in outer
cladding
area only
External cladding area
Internal cladding area
Unacceptable:
Crack extends into
inner cladding area
Unacceptable:
Crack extends
for more than 25% of
cladding circumference
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-11
Fiberscope
3.2.4.8 Procedure
To view the optical fiber connector:
1. Insert the connector into the Fiberscope, using the adapter if
required.
2. Depress the trigger to turn the Fiberscope on.
3. Adjust the Fiberscope, if necessary, to position the image in the
center of the viewing area, and focus.
4. Clean the connector face in accordance with par. 3.2.3 Cleaning of
Optical Cables and Connectors, if required.
5. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria due to damage, the
cable must be replaced.
6. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria after cleaning, and
further cleaning is not effective, the cable must be replaced.
3.3 Rack Installation
This chapter describes the precautions and the procedure required for
the installation of the SRT 1F rack.
3.3.1 Precautions
As a general precaution, installing sites should be selected as follows:
3.3.1.1 Suitable Places for Equipment Installation
Do not install in places subject to vibration.
Do not install in dusty places.
Avoid places which becomes high in temperature. (recommended
range 20C to 40C)
Install on a flat and level floor.
Do not eat or drink in the vicinity of the equipment
Keep away from strong electromagnetic fields.
When cleaning equipment, use a soft bristled brush and a vacuum
cleaner with plastic nozzle or low pressure dry air.
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.3.2 Safety Measures for Equipment Handling.
Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during
installation, removal, storage, or shipment. Such units are stamped with
anti-electrostatic marks and require special care in handling and
storage.
When handling slide-in units for installation, removal or option setting,
always wear a wrist strap which is connected to safety ground.
Hold only the edge of slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on
the units. Transport and store slide-in units in the special bags in which
the units were originally shipped. Always fold the open end of the bag
over and close it securely with tape. When returning units to Siemens
use these special bags. Use the original shipping containers whenever
possible.
During installation or replacement, all slide-in units should be seated
with a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into
slots. Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimize
power surges during installation. Slow insertion will ensure that the slide-
in units are not damaged.
3.3.3 Tools Required
Standard hand tools and socket wrench set are required.
Wrist strap - to be worn at all times when handling circuit cards.
3.3.4 Preparation
Use working gloves while installing and securing the equipment
According to the local plans and procedures, the main structure
must already be installed before installation of the equipment begins.
Check and ensure that all civil works necessary for the installation of
the equipment have been completed.
Ensure that these checks are made before the start of the
installation work. If anything is wrong or incomplete, take corrective
steps before starting the installation work.
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-13
3.3.4.1 Bay Mounting
When mounting the equipment rack, pay attention to other nearby
equipment and keep enough space to erect the equipment rack.
Before mounting the rack, heavy units such as MSTU must be taken
off. (originally, these are separately packed from the equipment
rack, for safe transportation.)
Ensure that each unit is properly inserted and secured, otherwise the
units will drop out of the shelf when mounting the bay upright
To avoid unexpected material from dropping off, remove in advance
the material which easily mounts into the equipment rack.
3.3.4.2 Bay Securing
Stand the rack in the vertical position at the designated bay layout.
First securing the top of the rack, then the base.
Use the ratchet wrench and suitable length extension bar to tighten
the bolts for fixing.
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.3.5 Rack Configuration
Figure 3-12 shows overview of SRT 1F radio equipment rack.
Figure 3-13 shows the dimensions of the standard rack.

Figure 3-12 - Overview of SRT 1F equipment rack

BBIU
(OPTION)
SCSU
MSTU
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-15

Figure 3-13 - Dimension of standard Rack
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.3.6 Shelf Configuration
Figure 3-14 shows shelf configuration of MSTU.
MSTU units are made to slide into the MSTU shelf via the plug-in
adapter.
DC power supply and RF signals connection between unit and shelf are
plugged in via the plug-in adapter. Other signal connections such as
baseband signals, supervision and control signals also plugged in via
the multi-pin connector mounted on the BWB of the SCSU shelf.

Figure 3-14 - MSTU shelf and MSTU unit

MSTU Adapter
Slide in rail
MSTU shelf
MSTU unit
MSTU Adapter
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-17
Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show overview of SCSU and BBIU shelf.

Figure 3-15 - Overview of SCSU shelf

Figure 3-16 - Overview of BBIU shelf
Connectors for MSTU
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.3.7 How to Install Shelves & Units
3.3.7.1 Preparation of Shelves
SCSU :
Remove connector covers of the channel to be installed (Figure 3-17).

Figure 3-17 - Remove connector covers
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-19
MSTU :
Remove the MSTU Adapter from each MSTU (Figure 3-18).
Remove two fittings from each MSTU Adapter (Figure 3-19)
These fittings are for transportation and unit testing only.
Install MSTU Adapters and Slide in Rails on to the shelf. (Figure 3-20)

Figure 3-18 Remove MSTU Adapter
Figure 3-19 - Remove 2 Fittings

Figure 3-20 - Install MSTU Adapter and Slide in Rails

3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.3.8 Mounting of Shelves
Shelves should be mounted on to the rack in the given order.
BBIU (if applicable), SCSU, MSTU then BRU (Figure 3-21 and Figure
3-22).

Figure 3-21

Position
BBIU
SCSU
BRU
MSTU
Install BBIU first, then SCSU, MSTU and
BRU.
If BBIU is not applicable, leave the
space for BBIU (498mm H) + cabling
space (approx. 70 mm), then start
mounting the SCSU, MSTU and BRU.

UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-21

Figure 3-22 Screew together the MSTU and SCSU
3 X 6S 4 x
4 X 8S 4 x
3 X 6S 2 x
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.3.8.1 Mounting of Slide-In Units
Slide-in units are locked to the shelf through latches.
To remove a slide in unit (SIU), lift latching levers and pull out the slide
in unit.
To mount a SIU, lift latching levers first, then slide in the unit firmly and
close latching levers ascertaining that the levers engage into the shelf
securely.
Full size SIUs have 2 latches both at the top and at the bottom.
To mount an SIU, ascertain that 2 levers are engaging to the shelf
evenly when closing latching levers.
Installing an MSTU :
An MSTU is equipped with 2 mounting screws.
When installing an MSTU, remove the front cover first. Then turn 2
screws evenly by lightly pressing the middle of the MSTU.
Do not slam the unit.

Figure 3-23 Full size unit mounting
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-23

Figure 3-24 Half size unit mounting

Half size SIUs have only one latch at the bottom.
To remove/mount an SIU, remove a guard rail from the shelf first as
shown at the top left.
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Figure 3-25 to Figure 3-26 show typical cable laying for inter-shelf
connection.

Figure 3-25 - Cable laying of MSTU shelf

Figure 3-26 - Cable laying of SCSU shelf
DC power supply Cable
Inter shelf connection cable
DC power supply cable
External signal line
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-25

Figure 3-27 - Cable laying of BBIU shelf
Optical fiber cable
DC power supply cable
Inter shelf connection
External signal lines
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.4 Inter Shelf Connections
This chapter provides information on the inter shelf connections and
customer interface connections between SRT 1F equipment and the
customers equipment.
3.4.1 SRT 1F Input
The equipment can operate one of followings five Base Band interface
conditions.
Base Band Interface Unit are optionally supplied for STM-1 optical
interface operation and PDH E4 interface operation.
1. MSTU unit for STM-1 electrical interface
One MSTU unit per channel may be used
2. OPT S-11P unit for STM-1 optical interface S-1.1
A maximum of two OPT S-11P units per channel may be used.
3. OPT L-11P unit for STM-1 optical interface L-1.1
A maximum of two OPT L-11P units per channel may be used.
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing or
maintaining the waveguide. These precautions ensure the safety of all
personnel and the protection of equipment.
Figure 3-28 shows the warning labels that are attached on all emitting
and receiving units:

Figure 3-28 - Warning Labels
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-27
3.4.2 Waveguide Connection
Figure 3-29 shows the location of the antenna port on SRT 1F radio
equipment.

Figure 3-29 - Antenna port location on top of the rack
Horizontal
CH 1, 2, 3, 4
Vertical
CH 1, 2, 3, 4
Horizontal
CH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Vertical
CH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Horizontal
CH 2, 4, 6, 8
Vertical
CH 1, 3, 5, 7
(a) Alternated Operation
(b) Co-channel Operation and independent use of rack by V / H polarization

(c) Co-channel Operation and common use of rack by V / H polarization
TOP of
ETSI rack
TOP of Waveguides
2
1
9
0
.
7

BRU
59.4
MAIN MAIN SD SD
MAIN SD MAIN SD
MAIN MAIN SD SD
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Standard hand tools
Step ladder for connecting wave guide
Ratchet type set of socket wrenches
Waveguide Allen keys
Torque wrench for waveguide Allen keys

UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-29
3.4.2.2 Preparation
Do not connect feeder to the equipment until all the twists in the feeder
have been corrected. See Figure 3-30
A person experienced in waveguide connections should carry out the
installation of the feeder to the equipment.
Refer to the wave guide installation manual.

Figure 3-30 - Twisting Wave guides
3.4.2.3 Precautions
When the wave guides are connected to the radio equipment, pay
attention not to apply a forced twisting torque to the radio equipment
side. Refer to the wave guide installation manual.
3.4.3 Connection of Primary Power Lead
This section provides procedures for installing DC power and ground
cables in the equipment rack and it shows the office power input
terminal identification.
There are two methods for DC power cable installation.
As shown in Figure 3-31, one is that the DC power distribution board
and the DC power connector of each unit and shelf is directly
connected.
As shown in Figure 3-32, the other is that the DC power from DC power
distribution board is received by the optionally supplied PDU (Power
Distribution Unit) then distributed to each unit and shelf.
Standard hand tools
DMM (Digital Multi-Meter)
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

BRU
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
B
B

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
[M2 M2 M2 M2] [M1 M1 M1 M1] [M3 M3 M3 M3] [M4 M4 M4 M4] [M5 M5 M5 M5] [M6 M6 M6 M6] [M7 M7 M7 M7]
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
- V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN
C
N

6
8
CN 74
CN 73
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN77
CN76 CN75
CN78 CN 79
CN 72
BBIU
SCSU

Figure 3-31 - DC power connection to the rack.

AMP Connector
-48V DC Power
for MSTU, SCSU, BBIU
from Office Power Supply

D
C

p
o
w
e
r

f
o
r

B
B
I
U
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

f
o
r

S
C
S
U
Crimping terminal
P
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
l
e
Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply.
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-31

PDU (OPTION)
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
C
N

5
C
N

4
C
N

3
C
N

2
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
C
N

1
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
C
N

1
1
C
N

1
0
C
N

1
2
C
N

9
C
N

8
C
N

7
C
N

6
DC Power Distribution Board of Office Power Supply
B
B

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN77
CN76 CN75
CN78 CN 79
CN 72
BBIU
SCSU

Figure 3-32 - DC power connection to the rack with PDU
AMP Crimping Terminal
AMP Connector
AMP Connector
AMP Connector
AMP Connector
P
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
l
e
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.4.3.2 Procedure
Prepare power lead and crimping terminal as specified on the local plan.
Main DC power distribution board side
Removing of cable sheath (see Figure 3-33 for details)
Crimp terminal by using die.
Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the
equipment cable inlet through the cable rack.
Equipment side
Assemble the AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory.
Figure 3-33 shows the cable sheath and terminal connection.

Figure 3-33 - Cable Sheath
1. Disconnect office power or remove fuses from bay fuse panel and
use a voltmeter to ensure that the supply rail is at zero volts (with
reference to the earth ground).
2. Connect the red (0 V) lead to the battery return terminal of the power
distribution board.
3. Connect the blue (48 V) lead to the 48V terminal.
4. Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the
equipment cable inlet through the cable rack.
5. Structure AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory.
6. Connect the AMP connector to the DC power connector of the
unit/shelf.
7. Reconnect office power or re-install fuses.
Recommendable cable
AWG 4
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-33
3.4.3.3 Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment
The crimping method (Solderless) shall be applied only to the power
wiring connecting terminal and to the indoor connection branching. Only
annealed copper is only used for this method. See Figure 3-34 for
crimping method.
Crimping Method
1. Choose the die fit for the cross-section area of the terminal to use.
2. Insert the terminal into the die section of the instrument and press
the terminal till it does not slip off. Then set the soldering portion of
the terminal body opposite to the male die while inserting the
terminal body to the center of the die. Take care not to deform the
terminal when compressing it.
3. Start crimping the terminal after having ascertained that vary the
relative position of terminal and die
4. Insulating treatment at the compressed portion. This treatment shall
be performed as follows:
More than 1 mm in width on the insulated sheath will be sealed.
Wind PVC tape with a half width tape pitch as required.
Figure 3-34 shows the method for crimping the terminal and the cable
conductor.

Figure 3-34 - Method of Crimping
3.4.3.4 Precautions
1. This equipment has the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Frame
Ground (FG) terminal. Therefore, if your station has an ESD Ground
terminal, connect to them. If not possible, connect to the FG of each
equipment to keep the same voltage level as FG.
2. While connecting the power lead, do not drop in any cable sheathing
or cable fragments. It may cause short circuits or faulty units.
3. Ensure that the cable is connected before turning on the main
breaker.
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-34 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.4.4 AMP hand Crimping Tool
This section provides application procedures for AMP hand crimping
tools.
Figure 3-35 shows over view of AMP hand crimping Tool 23470-1, which
crimps the AMP Dynamic D-5 loose-piece tab and receptacle contacts
listed in Figure 3-36. The front of the tool, into which the wire is inserted,
is AMP marked. Wire Size Marking and the Contact Series marking on
it. The contact is inserted into the Back of the tool.
The tool features two fixed dies (crimper), two movable dies (anvils), a
locator/insulation stop, and a CERTI-CRIMP ratchet.
The locator/insulation stop has two functions:
first, it positions the contact between the crimper and anvil before
crimping; and second, it limits insertion distance of the stripped wire into
the contact. In use, it rests in the locator slot of the contact. The CERTI-
CRIMP ratchet assures full crimping of the contact. Once engaged the
ratchet will not release until the handles have been fully closed.

Figure 3-35 - AMP hand Crimping Tool
FRONT OF TOOL
Contact series name
CIRTI-CRIMP RATCHET
Wire Size
Tool No.
ANVIL
CRIMPER
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-35

Figure 3-36 - AMP hand Crimping Method
WIRE STRIP LENGTH
CONTACT Series: D-5(S)
CONTACT NO.: 316041-3
WIRE SIZE
AWG: 16-14
Sq.(mm
2
): 1.23-2.27
Locator slot (in contact)
Wire Barrel
Insulation Barrel
Front of Tool(Wire Size)
Contact Series Name
Wire Slot in Locator
Wire Size
Stripped Wire
Tool No.
Contact series Name
Contact
Locator / Insulation stop

4.5 ~ 5.0
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-36 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.4.4.1 CRIMPING PROCEDURES
1. Hold the tool so FRONT is facing you.
2. Make sure ratchet is released by squeezing the tool handles and
allowing them to open Fully.
3. Holding contact by its mating portion and looking straight into front
of the crimp section, insert contact from the back into die set.
Position contact between crimpers so locator mates the locator slot.
4. Holding contact in this position, squeeze tool handles together until
insulation barrel anvil starts entry into insulation crimper. DO NOT
deform insulation barrel or wire barrel.
5. Insert a properly stripped wire through the wire slot in locator and
into wire barrel of contact until insulation butts against the
locator/insulation stop.
6. Holding wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet
releases. Use both hands after the wire is fixed.
7. Allow tool handles to open fully. Remove ped contact from tool.

CAUTION: Care shall be taken to ensure that the contact is set at the
right position (shown in Figure 3-37) so as to properly crimp the contact.

(b) Wrong Position (a) Right Position
LOCATOR
CRIMPER
ANVIL

Figure 3-37 - Right position for satisfactory crimping

UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-37
3.4.4.2 Assembling of AMP Connector
After crimping the AMP contacts, assemble the Rese-housing of the
AMP connectors. Refer to Figure 3-38.

AMP rese-housing
Type: 1-1-179958-2
AMP crimping contact
Insertion

Figure 3-38 - Assembling of AMP connector
3.4.4.3 Office Power Supply Check
This procedure verifies the office power for the SRT 1F radio equipment.
Standard hand tools
Digital Multi Meter (DMM)
3.4.4.5 Procedure
1. Remove the PWR connector from the station interface area (SIA).
2. Set the DMM scale to the 200 VDC range.
3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to Pin 1 of the connector and
the negative lead to Pin 2 of the connector.
4. Verify that the voltage is between 38.4V DC and 57.6V DC for
48V DC system. If it is not, contact the installation team.
5. Disconnect the DMM leads and connect the PWR connector to the SIA.
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-38 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.4.5 Frame Grounding
Figure 3-39 shows the Frame Ground connection of the SRT 1F radio
equipment rack.
The Frame Ground of the equipment rack should be connected to the
station ground bus at the right top corner of the SCSU shelf.
In addition to the connection, Frame Ground connection between shelf
also should be done.

BRU
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
B
B

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V
IN
- V
IN
- V
IN
- V
IN
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72

Figure 3-39 - Frame Ground of the Equipment Rack
Frame Ground
Connection
Frame Ground
Connection
Frame Ground
Connection
Frame Ground
Connection
Frame Ground
Connection
Frame Ground
Connection
Frame
Ground
Connection to
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-39
3.4.6 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms
The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F
installation.
Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn
Up procedures.
3.4.7 Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors
The SMA semi rigid coaxial connectors are pre-formed to exact lengths
to establish connection between the branch filter and the MSTU plug-in
Adapter. The transmitter output and receiver input are connected to the
branching network through the MSTU plug-in Adapter shown in Figure
3-40.
Pay attention when fitting or removing the semi rigid coaxial connectors.
Use the torque wrench with a 21/Ncm setting.
Unscrew each end before trying to remove the connector.

Top view of MSTU plug-in Adapter
MSTU plug-in Adapter
MN RX IN SD RX IN
TX OUT
SMA Connector
MSTU

Figure 3-40 - MSTU plug-in Adapter and semi rigid coaxial cable connector

3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-40 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

MAIN (V)
SD (V)
M
A
I
N
-
1

T
X
C
H

3
T
X

B
P
F
C
H

1
P
R
O
T

T
X
M
A
I
N
-
2

T
X
M
A
I
N
-
3

T
X
T
X

B
P
F
C
H

7
C
H

5
M
A
I
N
-
2

R
X
M
A
I
N
-
3

R
X
R
X

B
P
F
C
H

7
C
H

5
P
R
O
T

R
X
M
A
I
N
-
1

R
X
R
X

B
P
F
C
H

3
C
H

1
P
R
O
T

R
X
M
A
I
N
-
2

R
X
M
A
I
N
-
3

R
X
R
X

B
P
F
C
H

7
C
H

5
M
A
I
N
-
1

R
X
R
X

B
P
F
C
H

3
C
H

1

Figure 3-41 - Semi-rigid Cable connection between BRU and MSTU
(Example for 3+1, Alternated Operation)

BRU
MNRX MNRX MNRX MNRX
TX TX TX TX
SDRX SDRX SDRX SDRX
MAIN-3 MAIN-2 MAIN-1 PROT
MSTU
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-41
3.4.8 Inter shelf Connection for RPS, SV, and DCC
Inter shelf connection shown in
Figure 3-42 is necessary for (N+1) radio protection switching (RPS),
supervision (SV), and digital communication channel (DCC).
BRU BRU
PDU(OPTION)
C
N

5
C
N

4
C
N

3
C
N

2
C
N

1
C
N

1
1
C
N

1
0
C
N

1
2
C
N

9
C
N

8
C
N

7
C
N

6
PDU(OPTION)
C
N

5
C
N

4
C
N

3
C
N

2
C
N

1
C
N

1
1
C
N

1
0
C
N

1
2
C
N

9
C
N

8
C
N

7
C
N

6
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
C
N

5
3
C
N

5
3
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 74
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
M
S
T
U

9
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

1
0
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

1
1
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

1
2
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

1
4
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

1
3
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

1
5
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

1
6
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
B
S
W

1
4
B
S
W

1
3
B
S
W

1
2
B
S
W

1
1
B
S
W

1
0
B
S
W

9
B
S
W

8
B
S
W

I
N
T
F
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 74
CN 73
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
BBIU
SCSU SCSU
BBIU
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

1
B
B
C
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

3
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

2
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

5
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

4

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

3
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

7
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

6

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

4
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

9
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

8

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

5
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
1
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
0

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

6
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
3
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
2

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

7
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
5
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
4

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

8
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
6

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

9
B
B
C
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
8
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
7

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

1
0
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
0
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

1
9

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

1
1
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
2
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
1

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

1
2
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
4
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
3

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

1
3
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
6
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
5

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

1
4
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
8
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
7

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

1
5
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

3
0
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

2
9

o
r

P
E

I
N
T
F

1
6
[M2 M2 M2 M2] [M1 M1 M1 M1] [M3 M3 M3 M3] [M4 M4 M4 M4] [M5 M5 M5 M5] [M6 M6 M6 M6] [M7 M7 M7 M7] [M2 M2 M2 M2] [M1 M1 M1 M1] [M3 M3 M3 M3] [M4 M4 M4 M4] [M5 M5 M5 M5] [M6 M6 M6 M6] [M7 M7 M7 M7]
CD308
CD304
CD308
CD304
CN 73

To operate 2
nd
RPS, remove the cables CD304 and CD 308 to the 2
nd
RPS rack.

Figure 3-42 - Inter shelf Connection for Radio Protection Switching, Supervision, and
Digital Communication Channel (DCC)
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-42 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.4.9 Baseband Signal Cable Connection
3.4.9.1 STM-1 electrical signal Interface
Figure 3-43 shows the STM-1 electrical interface baseband signal
connection done on BSW (Baseband Switch) unit front panel.
Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 27CP and line impedance is 75
ohms and unbalanced.

BRU
M
S
T
U

1
M
S
T
U

2
M
S
T
U

3
M
S
T
U

4
M
S
T
U

6
M
S
T
U

5
M
S
T
U

7
M
S
T
U

8
[ P P P P ] [M1 M1 M1 M1] [M2 M2 M2 M2] [M3 M3 M3 M3] [M5 M5 M5 M5] [M4 M4 M4 M4] [M6 M6 M6 M6] [M7 M7 M7 M7]
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
SCSU
BBIU

Figure 3-43 - STM-1 electrical signal interface baseband signal connection
Front View of BSW unit
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
Wayside Signal IN/OUT
WS-S
WS-R
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-43
3.4.9.2 STM-1 optical signal Interface
Figure 3-44 shows inter shelf connection of the baseband signal and
Figure 3-45 shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between SRT 1F
radio equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment done on the
PCB of the OPT INTF (Optical signal Interface) unit.
Optical Fiber connector is of the FC type and are accessed from the
front of the equipment rack.

BRU
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
C
N
6
8 CN 73
CN 74
C
N
6
5
C
N
6
6
C
N
6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
BBIU
SCSU
M
S
T
U

1
M
S
T
U

2
M
S
T
U

3
M
S
T
U

4
M
S
T
U

6
M
S
T
U

5
M
S
T
U

7
M
S
T
U

8

Figure 3-44 - Inter shelf connection of baseband signal
STM-1
STM-1
CMI OUT
CMI OUT
CMI IN
CMI IN
OCC INTF
BSW 1 BSW 2 BSW3 BSW 7
OCC IN
OCC OUT
MSP SW: 1 2 3 7

3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-44 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

BRU
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
BBIU
SCSU
M
S
T
U

1
M
S
T
U

2
M
S
T
U

3
M
S
T
U

4
M
S
T
U

6
M
S
T
U

5
M
S
T
U

7
M
S
T
U

8

Figure 3-45 - STM-1 connection between SRT 1F radio equipment and Optical Fiber
Transmission equipment
To/from Optical Fiber Transmission Equipment
I
N

O
U
T

Side View of OPT INTF unit
Optical cable
Connector
To/from Unit
Front View of
OPT INTF unit
STM-1 STM-1
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-45
3.4.10 Wayside Signal Cable Connection
Figure 3-46 shows the 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection done on the
front panel of the BSW (Baseband Switch) unit.
Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 27CP and line impedance is 75
ohms and unbalanced.

BRU
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
SCSU
M
S
T
U

1
M
S
T
U

2
M
S
T
U

3
M
S
T
U

4
M
S
T
U

6
M
S
T
U

5
M
S
T
U

7
M
S
T
U

8
BBIU

Figure 3-46 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection
Front View of BSW unit
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
Wayside Signal IN/OUT
(HDB3, 75 ohms, unbalance)
Wayside Signal IN/OUT(HDB3, 12 ohms, balance)
See Chapter 5, section 5.11, PIN assignment
WS-S
WS-R
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-46 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.4.11 Inter shelf connection for CO-channel operation
For co-channel operation, inter shelf connection shown in Figure 3-47 or
Figure 3-48 are necessary for XPIC operation. Figure 3-47 is applied
when that V/H equipment is installed in a separate rack and Figure 3-48
is applied when the V/H equipment is installed in the same rack.
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

2
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

3
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

4
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

5
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

6
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

7
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

8
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
0
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
1
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
2
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
3
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
4
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
5
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
6
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

9

Figure 3-47 - Inter shelf connection for Co-channel operation (V / H equipment installed in
separate rack)
BRU
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
SCSU
BBIU
BRU
M
S
T
U

9
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

1
0
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

1
1
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

1
2
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

1
4
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

1
3
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

1
5
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

1
6
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
BBIU
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
SCSU
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
B
S
W

1
4
B
S
W

1
3
B
S
W

1
2
B
S
W

1
1
B
S
W

1
0
B
S
W

9
B
S
W

8
B
S
W

I
N
T
F
- V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN

[ 2nd Radio Protection System ] [ 1st Radio Protection System ]
No power supply is
required for
SCSU of 2nd RPS
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-47

REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

2
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

3
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

4
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

5
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

6
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

7
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

8
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
0
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
1
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
2
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
3
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
4
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
5
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

1
6
REF
I / O
OUT
IN
X
P
I
C
M
S
T
U

9

Figure 3-48 - Inter shelf connection for Co-channel operation
(V / H equipment installed in the same rack)
BRU
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
SCSU
BBIU
M
S
T
U

9
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

1
0
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

1
1
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

1
2
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

1
4
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

1
3
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

1
5
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

1
6
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
BRU
BBIU
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
SCSU
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
B
S
W

1
4
B
S
W

1
3
B
S
W

1
2
B
S
W

1
1
B
S
W

1
0
B
S
W

9
B
S
W

8
B
S
W

I
N
T
F

[ 2nd Radio Protection System ] [ 1st Radio Protection System ]
No power supply is
required for
SCSU of 2nd RPS
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-48 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.5 Connector and Connector Pin Assignment
This chapter provides information on the connector and connector pin
assignments.
3.5.1 Connectors Layout on Back Wired Board (BWB)
Figure 3-49 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (7+1)
SRT 1F radio equipment rack and Figure 3-50 shows multi-pin
connectors layout on the BWB of 2(7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack.
PDU(OPTION)
BRU
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
B
B

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
C
N

5
C
N

4
C
N

3
C
N

2
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
C
N

1
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
C
N

1
1
C
N

1
0
C
N

1
2
C
N

9
C
N

8
C
N

7
C
N

6
BBIU
SCSU

Figure 3-49 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack
CN 11
CN 5 CN 4
CN 4 CN 3
CN 2
CN 1
CN
CN
Detail
Detail
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-49

PDU(OPTION)
BRU
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
B
B

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
C
N

5
C
N

4
C
N

3
C
N

2
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
C
N

1
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
C
N

1
1
C
N

1
0
C
N

1
2
C
N

9
C
N

8
C
N

7
C
N

6
PDU(OPTION)
BRU
M
S
T
U

9
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

1
0
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

1
1
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

1
2
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

1
4
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

1
3
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

1
5
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

1
6
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
B
B

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

1
5
M
S
P
S
W

1
3
M
S
P
S
W

1
2
M
S
P
S
W

1
1
M
S
P
S
W

1
0
M
S
P
S
W

9
M
S
P
S
W

8
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
B
S
W

1
4
B
S
W

1
3
B
S
W

1
2
B
S
W

1
1
B
S
W

1
0
B
S
W

9
B
S
W

8
B
S
W

I
N
T
F
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
C
N

5
C
N

4
C
N

3
C
N

2
-V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
C
N

1
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
C
N

1
1
C
N

1
0
C
N

1
2
C
N

9
C
N

8
C
N

7
C
N

6
BBIU
SCSU SCSU
BBIU

Figure 3-50 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of 2 (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment
rack
* Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power
supply.
2nd Radio Protection System 1st Radio Protection System
*
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-50 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.5.1.1 Connectors on the BWB of SCSU
Table 3.1 lists all the connectors on the BWB of SCSU.
Table 3.1 - Connectors on the BWB of SCSU
CN No. Description Remarks Connector Type
CN 1 EXT SX Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 27CP coaxial
CN 2 EXT SY Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 27CP coaxial
CN 3 T4 SX Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 27CP coaxial
CN 4 T4 SY Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 27CP coaxial
CN 5 T0SX Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 27CP coaxial
CN 6 T0 SY Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 27CP coaxial
CN 11 WS/UC 1 Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 21 HK 2 Housekeeping (DI/DO) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 31 RAB Rack Alarm BUS Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 32 EOW Engineering Order Wire Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 33 RUC Radio User Channel Dsub 25 multi-pin
CN 35 OSSI Operation Support System Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 40 S-INTF 1 Serial Interface 1 DHA80 multi-pin
CN 41 S-INTF 2 Serial Interface 2 DHA80 multi-pin
CN 42 SSMB 1 Synchronous State Message Byte BUS DHA40 multi-pin
CN 43 SSMB 2 Synchronous State Message Byte BUS DHA40 multi-pin
CN 44 CM-BUS Channel Management BUS DHA68 multi-pin
CN 45 EOW Engineering Order Wire DHA68 multi-pin

UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-51
3.5.1.2 Connectors on the BWB of BBIU
Table 3.2 lists all the connectors on the BWB of BBIU are listed up.
Table 3.2 - Connectors on the BWB of BBIU
CN No. Description Remarks Connector Type
CN 65 UC 1, 2 User Channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 68 UC 7 User Channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 72 EOW IN Engineering Order Wire Input DHA68 multi-pin
CN 73 EOW OUT Engineering Order Wire Output DHA68 multi-pin
CN 74 EOW TERM DHA68 multi-pin
CN 75 CMB IN Channel Management BUS IN DHA68 multi-pin
CN 76 CMB OUT Channel Management BUS OUT DHA68 multi-pin
CN 77 CMB TERM DHA68 multi-pin
CN 78 SSMB Synchronous Status Management Byte BUS DHA40 multi-pin
CN 79 DCC Data Communication Channel DHA80 multi-pin
CN 80 OCC OUT Occasional signal Output 27CP coaxial
CN 81 OCC IN Occasional signal Input 27CP coaxial

3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-52 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.5.2 Connector PIN assignment for OSSI
Table 3.3 shows the Connector PIN assignment for OSSI.
Use Access Name Connector No. on BWB Type of Connector
OSSI SCSU-CN35 Dsub 37

Table 3.3 - Connector PIN assignment for OSSI
PIN
No.
Description Remarks PIN
No.
Description Remarks
19 SG Signal Ground
37 SG Signal Ground 18
36 17 OSSTC1 A(O) B-B element timing (A)
35 OSSTC1 B(O) B-B element timing
(B)
16
34 15
33 14
32 13 OSSDCD A( I ) Carrier Detected (A)
31 OSSDCD B(I) R Carrier Detected (B) 12 OSSDTR A(O) Data Term. Ready (A)
30 OSSDTR B(O) Data Term. Ready (B) 11 OSSDSR A( I ) Data Set Ready (A)
29 OSSDSR B(I) Data Set Ready (B) 10
28 9 OSSCTS A( I ) Clear to SEND (A)
27 OSSCTS B(I) Clear to SEND (B) 8 OSSRXC A( I ) R element timing (A)
26 OSSRXC B(I) R element timing (B) 7 OSSRTS A(O) Request to SEND (A)
25 OSSRTS B(O) Request to SEND (B) 6 OSSRXD A( I ) RX DATA (A)
24 OSSRXD B(I) RX DATA (B) 5 OSSTC2 A( I ) T element timing (A)
23 OSSTC2 B(I) T element timing (B) 4 OSSTXD A(O) TX DATA (A)
22 OSSTXD B(O) TX DATA (B) 3
21 2
20 1 FG Frame Ground

37
20 1
19
(Front view of BWB side)
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-53
3.5.3 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1
Table 3.4 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK1.
HK1 SCSU-CN34 Dsub 37

Table 3.4 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1
PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
19 Reserved Leave OPEN
37 Reserved Leave OPEN 18 Reserved Leave OPEN
33 Reserved Leave OPEN 14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C
32 DO-4N Housekeeping OUT-4N 13 DO-3C Housekeeping OUT-3C
29 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N 10 HK-Common HK Common Ground
28 HK-Common HK Common Ground 9 SDA SG Signal Ground for Monitor
27 Reserved Leave OPEN 8 SD AGC SD AGC monitor (W1)
26 Reserved Leave OPEN 7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
25 Reserved Leave OPEN 6 AGC MON AGC monitor (W1)
24 Reserved Leave OPEN 5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7
23 DI-8 Housekeeping IN-8 4 DI-5 Housekeeping IN-5
20 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-2 1 FG Frame Ground

37
20 1
19
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-54 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
19
37 18 HK1 DO-8C Housekeeping OUT-8C
36 HK1 DO-8N Housekeeping OUT-8N 17 HK1 DO-7C Housekeeping OUT-7C
29 HK1 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N 10 HK-Common HK Common Ground
28 HK-Common HK Common Ground 9 HK1 DI-15 Housekeeping IN-15
27 HK1 DI-16 Housekeeping IN-16 8 HK1 DI-13 Housekeeping IN-13
20 HK1 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-2 1 FG Frame Ground

37
20 1
19
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-55

PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
19
21 HK1DI-20 Housekeeping IN-20 2 HK1 DI-17 Housekeeping IN-17
20 HK1DI-18 Housekeeping IN-18 1 FG Frame Ground

37
20 1
19
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-56 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
19

37
20 1
19
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-57

PIN
No.
No.
Descriptio
n
Remarks
19

37
20 1
19
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-58 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.5.8 Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel
Table 3.9 shows the Connector PIN assignment for RUC.
RUC SCSU-CN33 Dsub 25

Table 3.9 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC
PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
13 SG Signal Ground
25 SG Signal Ground 12 U1R CKN (O) CH1 R CLK N (OUT)
24 U2R CKN (O) CH2 R CLK N (OUT) 11 U1R CKP (O) CH1 R CLK P (OUT)
23 U2R CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) 10 SG Signal Ground
22 SG Signal Ground 9 U1R DN ( I ) CH1 R DATA N (IN) 4WR
21 U2R DN ( I ) CH2 T DATA N (IN) 4WR 8 U1R DP ( I ) CH1 R DATA P (IN) 4WR
20 U2R DP ( I ) CH2 T DATA P (IN) 4WR 7 SG Signal Ground
19 SG Signal Ground 6 U1T CKN (O) CH1 T CLK N (OUT)
18 U2T CKN (O) CH2 T CLK N (OUT) 5 U1T CKP (O) CH1 T CLK P (OUT)
17 U2T CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) 4 SG Signal Ground
16 SG Signal Ground 3 U1T DN (O) CH1 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS
15 U2T DN (O) CH2 T DATA N (OUT)
4WS
2 U1T DP (O) CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS
14 U2T DP (O) CH2 T DATA P (OUT)
4WS
1 FG Frame Ground

14
1
25
13
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-59
3.5.9 Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS
Table 3.10 shows the Connector PIN assignment for PAB.
RAB SCSU-CN31 Dsub 15

Table 3.10 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB
PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7 VIS MN Visible Miner alarm
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6 AUD MN Audible Miner alarm
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 5 VIS MJ Visible Major alarm
12 NE ALM-C NE alarm 4 AUD MJ Audible Major alarm
11 RAB-MNT Maintenance 3 VIS CR Visible Critical alarm
10 VIS WR Visible Warning 2 AUD CR Audible Critical alarm
9 AUD WR Audible Warning 1 FG Frame Ground

9 1
15
8
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-60 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.5.10 Connector PIN assignment for EOW
Table 3.11 shows the Connector PIN assignment for PAB.
EOW SCSU-CN32 Dsub 15

Table 3.11 - Connector PIN assignment for EOW
PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
8 E2 IN T (IN) 4WR E2ch T
15 E2 IN R(IN) 4WR E2ch R 7 E2-OUT T (OUT) 4WS E2ch T
14 E2-OUT R(OUT) 4WS E2ch R 6 CALL2-C Calling E2 common
13 CALL2-N Calling E2-N-line 5 SG Signal Ground
12 SG Signal Ground 4 CALL1-C Calling E1 common
11 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line 3 E1-IN T(IN) 4WR E1ch T
10 E1-IN R(IN) 4WR E1ch R 2 E1-OUT T (O) 4WS E1ch T
9 E1-OUT R(O) 4WS E1ch R 1 FG Frame Ground

9
1
15
8
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-61
3.5.11 Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC
Table 3.12 shows the Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC.
WS/UC 1 SCSU-CN11 Dsub 37

Table 3.12 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC
PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
19 SG Signal Ground
37 SG Signal Ground 18 SG Signal Ground
36 SG Signal Ground 17 SUC LRCN (O) LINE side RCLK (N)
35 SUC RTCN (O) RADIO side TCLK (N) 16 SUC LRCP (O) LINE side RCLK (P)
34 SUC RTCP (O) RADIO side TCLK (P) 15 SUC LRDN ( I ) LINE side RDATA(N)
33 SUC RTDN (O) RADIO side TDATA(N) 14 SUC LRDP ( I ) LINE side RDATA(P)
32 SUC RTDP (O) RADIO side TDATA(P) 13 SG Signal Ground
30 SG Signal Ground 11 WSR OUT N (O) RFCOH WS OUT (N)
29 SUC RRCN (O) RADIO side RCLK (N) 10 WSR OUT P (O) RFCOH WS OUT (P)
28 SUC RRCP (O) RADIO side RCLK (P) 9 WSR IN N ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (N)
27 SUC RRDN ( I ) RADIO side RDATA(N) 8 WSR IN P ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (P)
26 SUC RRDP ( I ) RADIO side RDATA(P) 7 SG Signal Ground
24 SG Signal Ground 5 WSS OUT N (O) SOH WS OUT (N)
23 SUC LTCN (O) LINE side TCLK (N) 4 WSS OUT P (O) SOH WS OUT (P)
22 SUC LTCP (O) LINE side TCLK (P) 3 WSS IN N ( I ) SOH WS IN (N)
21 SUC LTDN (O) LINE side TDATA (N) 2 WSS IN P ( I ) SOH WS IN (P)
20 SUC LTDP (O) LINE side TDATA (P) 1 SG Signal Ground

37
1 20
19
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-62 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
3.5.12 Connector PIN assignment for User Channel
Table 3.13 shows the Connector PIN assignment for UC.
UC 1, 2 BBIU-CN65 Dsub 37
UC 7 BBIU-CN68 Dsub 37

Table 3.13 - Connector PIN assignment for UC
PIN
No.
No.
Description Remarks
19 SG Signal Ground
36 LRXUCDT N2 LINE RX DATA (N) 2 17 LRXUCDT N1 LINE RX DATA (N) 1
35 LRXUCDT P2 LINE RX DATA (P) 2 16 LRXUCDT P1 LINE RX DATA (P) 1
34 LRXUCCLK N2 LINE RX CLK (N) 2 15 LRXUCCLK N1 LINE RX CLK (N) 1
33 LRXUCCLK P2 LINE RX CLK (P) 2 14 LRXUCCLK P1 LINE RX CLK (P) 1
32 LTXUCDT N2 LINE TX DATA (N) 2 13 LTXUCDT N1 LINE TX DATA (N) 1
31 LTXUCDT P2 LINE TX DATA (P) 2 12 LTXUCDT P1 LINE TX DATA (P) 1
30 LTXUCCLK N2 LINE TX CLK (N) 2 11 LTXUCCLK N1 LINE TX CLK (N) 1
29 LTXUCCLK P2 LINE TX CLK (P) 2 10 LTXUCCLK P1 LINE TX CLK (P) 1
28 RRXUCDT N2 RADIO RX DATA (N) 2 9 RRXUCDT N1 RADIO RX DATA (N) 1
27 RRXUCDT P2 RADIO RX DATA (P) 2 8 RRXUCDT P1 RADIO RX DATA (P) 1
26 RRXUCCLK N2 RADIO RX CLK (N) 2 7 RRXUCCLK N1 RADIO RX CLK (N) 1
25 RRXUCCLK P2 RADIO RX CLK (P) 2 6 RRXUCCLK P1 RADIO RX CLK (P) 1
24 RTXUCDT N2 RADIO TX DATA (N) 2 5 RTXUCDT N1 RADIO TX DATA (N) 1
23 RTXUCDT P2 RADIO TX DATA (P) 2 4 RTXUCDT P1 RADIO TX DATA (P) 1
22 RTXUCCLK N2 RADIO TX CLK (N) 2 3 RTXUCCLK N1 RADIO TX CLK (N) 1
21 RTXUCCLK P2 RADIO TX CLK (P) 2 2 RTXUCCLK P1 RADIO TX CLK (P) 1

20
1
37
19
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 3-63
3.5.13 Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock
Coaxial Connectors, CN 1 to CN 6, located on BWB of the SCSU are
used for IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz
square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be selected
through LCT and hardware switch on TCU.
Table 3.14 - Coaxial Connectors for External Synchronization Signal
CN No. Description Remarks
CN 1 EXT SX Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
2.048 MHz square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system
CN 2 EXT SY Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
2.048 MHz square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system
CN 3 T4 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
2.048 MHz square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system
CN 4 T4 SY Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
2.048 MHz square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system
CN 5 T0 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for
X-system
CN 6 T0 SY Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for
Y-system

3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
3-64 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

UMN 4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-1
4 ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP
4.1 ACCEPTANCE OF THE SRT 1F
Acceptance tests are performed to ensure that proper installation
procedures detailed in Chapter 3, have been followed. Acceptance tests
verify the following:
Proper power wiring has been provided to the bay
Equipment shelves are free of defects or damage
Factory-wired power circuits are properly connected. The acceptance
tests generally assume:
Accurate and concise system designations and office records are
available to properly identify systems and equipment
Any faults found and not corrected during testing are referred to the
installation group responsible
The test equipment required is available, properly tested and
working correctly
4.1.1 Perform Overall Visual Inspection
1. Locate the SRT 1F rack and bay that will house the equipment.
2. Place yourself facing the rack.
3. Check that no slide-in units are installed. Remove any units that
are installed.
4. Check that the shelves are secure and free of defects or damage.
5. Check that all electrical connectors inside the shelves are properly
secured and aligned in the shelf slots.
6. Check that there are no broken, bent or mis-aligned contacts in
the connectors.
7. Check that there are no mis-aligned, dented or twisted shelves.
8. Check that there is no broken or damaged equipment
(connectors, wiring, back wired boards, etc.).
9. Check that all cabling and wiring is terminated and secured in
place.
10. Check that the wiring from the central office battery supply is
connected to the power connector on the SRT 1F rack.
11. Check that the plug from the office alarm system is connected to
the SRT 1F rack alarm bus connector (CN31 on BWB of SCSU).
12. Check that the SRT 1F rack connections to the equipment outside
of the bay have been made.
13. Check that the feeder connections are properly terminated.
14. Record the inspection results
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP UMN
SRT 1F
4-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Note: Report any problems to the installation group.
4.1.2 Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack
This procedure lists the steps required to check the incoming power
supply to the SRT 1F rack. Before beginning this procedure, turn on the
main power supply and check that the fuse assigned to the shelf is
inserted properly.
4.1.2.1 Test Equipment Required
Digital Multimeter (DMM) or equivalent.
4.1.2.2 Procedure
1. Turn off the all No-Fuse Breakers on the units and shelves.
2. Unplug all the power connectors from all the units and shelves
equipped on the rack.
3. Confirm the voltage between the 48V and Battery return
terminals in the power connector. 38.4 V DC and 57.6 V DC for
48V system
4. If OK continue with Step 5. If NO report the problem to the
installation group.
5. Re plug in all the power connectors.
6. Turn on all the No-Fuse Breakers on the units and shelves.
Power cable
AMP connector: 1-79958-2
Black
48 V
Violet
Plus
Minus

Figure 4-1 - SRT 1F PWR Connector
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-3
4.2 Installation of the SRT 1F Slide-in Units
This chapter provides instructions to install the various units into the
SRT 1F rack.
4.2.1 Warning Messages
the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment.
4.2.1.1 Laser Warning
WARNING
Never look into the end of an optical cable or fiber pigtail.
Never handle exposed fiber with bare hands or permit contact with
the body. Fiber fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect
and remove.

DANGER
Invisible laser
radiation from
connectors when
uncoupled.
AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE TO
BEAM.
4.2.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge Warning
CAUTION
installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic
discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Figure 4-3) and require
special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be
strictly observed:
SRT 1F
4-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling slide-in
units. The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 k.
Before using the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum
resistance value. Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks.
Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry
on the units.
Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were
originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and
secure with tape.
Return units to Siemens in special bags and original shipping
containers.

Figure 4-3 - ESD Warning Labels
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-5
4.2.2 Slide-In Installation Procedures
This procedure assumes that:
1. The equipment rack has been installed in accordance with local
procedures.
2. The SRT 1F rack has been installed and connected according to the
procedure described in par. Connector and Connector Pin
Assignment.
3. The procedures described in par. 4.1, Acceptance of SRT 1F rack
have been performed.
This procedure is provided as a guide to equipping the SRT 1F rack.
4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units
This section details the procedures to be followed for the insertion and
removal of all slide-in units.
Warning
During replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow,
but firm motion.
They should not be pushed quickly into the slot.
Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimise
power surges during unit replacement.
A slow insertion method will ensure that the slide-in units are not
damaged.
SRT 1F
4-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.2.3.1 Inserting a Slide-In Unit
1. If required, set the option switches and straps on the unit to
customer requirements. These settings are detailed in the par. 4.8.2.
2. Ensure the card extractor levers are fully open, then slowly press the
unit into the correct mounting slot. Carefully close the top and
bottom extractor levers with both hands, until they latch, to set the
unit in the backboard connectors.
3. The backboard connectors are keyed to accept only the card
assigned to that position. See Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 - Inserting a Slide-in Unit

Attention
Do not slam the unit into the shelf.
It may damage connectors.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-7
4.2.3.2 Removing a Slide-In Unit
1. Locate the slide-in unit to be removed.
2. Gently pull open the top and bottom extractor levers until the slide-in
unit is free from the rear connector (see Figure 4-5). If the unit is
hard to remove, gently push the card in, then raise the extractor
levers.
Do not force the levers open. See Figure 4-5.
3. Carefully remove the slide-in unit from the mounting shelf.

Figure 4-5 - Removing a Slide-in Unit
Figure 4-6 shows a detailed description of the extraction levers.

Figure 4-6 - Detail of an Extractor Lever
SRT 1F
4-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.2.3.3 Removing an Optical Unit
1. Gently pull the top and bottom extractor levers out with both hands
until the unit is pulled free from the backboard connector.
2. Slowly pull the unit until it is stopped by the card stopper located at
the bottom edge of the card.
3. Disconnect the optical fiber cords if they are connected to the unit.
An instruction label is located on the Optical Interface unit. This
label is visible when the unit is partially removed.
4. Fit the protection caps to the optical fiber connectors and on the
unit if they are not already fitted with the protection caps.
5. Lift the metal spring on the card stopper and remove the unit
completely out of the shelf. See Figure 4-7.
Note: Care must be taken when removing units with optical fiber cables
connected to prevent undue stress being placed on the fiber cables.
See par Optical Circuits, Fiber Optic Cables and Jumpers for optical
fiber cable handling procedures.
0
1
5
7
0

Figure 4-7 - Removing an Optical Unit
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-9
4.2.4 Installing the MSTU Unit
1. Slide the MSTU unit into its appropriate position in the MSTU shelf
with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Figure 3.14 of par. Shelf
Configuration.
All of signal connections such as TX output power, RX input signal,
Baseband signal, and DC power supply, are plugged in.
2. Fasten the front locking screws finger tight.

Attention
When you install the MSTU unit:
Tighten two locking screws at top and bottom alternately while
lightly pressing the middle of the unit.
4.2.5 Installing SCSU Unit
1. Slide the SCSU unit, SV, BSW, HK, TCU, ECU, into its appropriate
position in the SCSU shelf with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the
Figure 3.15 of par. Shelf Configuration.
2. Confirm that it has been firmly plugged in.
4.2.6 Installing BBIU Unit
1. Slide the BBIU unit, PE INTF, BBC, MSP SW into its appropriate
position in the BBIU shelf with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the
Figure 3.16 of par. Shelf Configuration.
2. Confirm that it has been firmly plugged in.
4.2.7 Installing the Optical Interface (OPT INTF) Unit
4.2.7.1 Procedure
1. Slide the optical interface unit into its appropriate position in the
appropriate shelf with a slow but firm motion.
2. Remove the protective cap from the fiber patch cord.
3. Insert the fiber patch cords to their respective In and Out positions.
SRT 1F
4-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.3 SRT 1F Acceptance and Turn-Up Tests
This chapter outlines the Acceptance and Turn-Up tests required to
commission the SRT 1F.
4.3.1 Warning Messages
the safety of all personnel and the protection of the equipment.
4.3.1.1 Laser Warning
WARNING
Never look into the end of an optical cable or fiber pigtail.
Never handle exposed fiber with bare hands or permit contact with
the body. Fiber fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect
and remove.

DANGER
Invisible laser
radiation from
connectors when
uncoupled.
AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE TO
BEAM.
4.3.1.2 Inserting Plugin Units
CAUTION
During installation or replacement, seat all slide-in units with a slow but
firm action. Do not push them quickly into a slot. Many slide-in units
have longer power connector pins to minimise power surges during
installation. Insert the slide-in units slowly to avoid damage.
Refer to par. 4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-In Units for unit
installation and removal procedures.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-11
4.3.1.3 Electrostatic Discharge Warning
CAUTION
installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic
discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Figure 4-9) and require
special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be
strictly observed:
Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling plug-in
units. The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 k.
Before using the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum
resistance value. Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks.
Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry
on the units.
Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were
originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and
secure with tape.
Return units to Siemens in special bags and original shipping
containers.

Figure 4-9 - ESD Warning Labels

SRT 1F
4-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.3.2 SRT 1F In-Station, Inter-Station and End to End Tests
Task Name Manual Reference Note
In Station Tests
Hardware Settings Par. 4.5.1
Software Settings Par. 4.5.2
Transmit Local OSC Frequency Par. 4.5.3
Transmit Output Power Level Par. 4.5.4
Transmit Spectrum Par. 4.5.5
AGC Range Par. 4.5.6
Optical Output Power Par. 4.5.7
MAX / MIN Receive (RX) Level Par. 4.5.8
External Clock Par. 4.5.9
Rack Alarm Test Par. 4.5.10
Inter- Station Tests
RX Signal Level Par. 4.6.1
IF- IF Test Par. 4.6.2
IF DADE Test Par. 4.6.3
ATPC Par. 4.6.4
End to End Station Tests
DCC Test Par. 4.7.1
Radio Protection (RPS) Switch Par. 4.7.2
Wayside Signal Transmission Test Par. 4.7.3
BER Characteristics Test Par. 4.7.4
Stability Test (Residual BER) Par. 4.7.5
Sync Source Switching Par. 4.7.6
MSP Switching Par. 4.7.7

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-13
4.3.3 Test Equipment Required
The following test equipment is required to carry out the commissioning
tests:
RF power meter with 50 and 75 leads
Spectrum Analyzer
Network Analyzer with sweep generator or equivalent
Microwave link analyzer (70 MHz)
Variable attenuator for RF
Miscellaneous RF / IF cables and accessories
STM-1 transmission analyzer
Variable optical attenuator with SC connectors (or FC/PC
connectors with 2FC/PC to SC patch cords)
Optical power meters with SC connector (or FC/PC connector with
one FC/PC to FC/PC patch cords)
Frequency counter for RF.
SRT 1F
4-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.4 Waveguide and Antenna Alignment Tests
4.4.1 Waveguide Sweeping
4.4.1.1 Procedure for Return Loss Measurement

Sweeper
Waveguide
Adapter
Directional
Coupler
Network Analyzer
Waveguide
Transducer
Waveguide
Detector
Detector
Divider
Antenna

Figure 4-10 - Return Loss Measurement
1. Connect the test equipment to the Waveguide as shown in Figure
4-10.
(a) The output of the sweep generator connects to the
input of the divider.
(b) One output of the divider connects to the directional
coupler and the other port of the divider connects via
a detector to the network analyzer reference input.
(c) The output (forward) connection of the directional
coupler connects to the waveguide adapter
(d) The reflected port of the coupler connects via a
detector to the input of the network analyzer.
2. Calibrate the network analyzer (cal menu) using the waveguide
short.
3. Configure the network analyzer for a sweep range of the allocated
radio frequency band.
4. Attach the waveguide transition to the waveguide adapter and read
the reflected power directly from the display on the network analyzer.
The waveguide transition must be tuned to achieve a basically flat
response (as close as possible to flat), of less than 20 dBm
(theoretical value is 20 to 40 dBm). Refer to Table 4.1 for
theoretical return loss calculation data.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-15
NOTE: When sweeping waveguide on the drum, a sliding load must be inserted
into the open end of the waveguide to form a temporary termination
(simulation of the antenna).
Table 4.1 - Theoretical return loss calculation data
Return Loss(dB)
Reflection
Coefficient (%)
VSWR
14.0 19.95 1.50
15.0 17.78 1.43
16.0 15.85 1.38
17.0 14.13 1.33
18.0 12.59 1.29
19.0 11.22 1.25
20.0 10.00 1.222
21.0 8.93 1.196
22.0 7.943 1.173
23.0 7.079 1.152
24.0 6.310 1.135
25.0 5.563 1.119
26.0 5.012 1.106
27.0 4.467 1.094
28.0 3.981 1.083
29.0 3.548 1.074
30.0 3.162 1.065
35.0 1.778 1.036
40.0 1.000 1.020
45.0 .05623 1.011

Conversion Formulas
Return Loss: RL = 20log()
Reflection Coefficient: = (VSWR 1) (VSWR + 1)
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio: VSWR = (1+) (1)
SRT 1F
4-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.4.2 Antenna Alignment
1. Align the antenna in both planes according to the site drawings
(elevation angle will have to be calculated from the height above sea
level). If site data is not available, adjust the antenna for 0 elevation.
2. Pan the antenna in the horizontal plane and have a second party to
check the RX or AGC voltage (using a spectrum analyzer) for the
distant sites signature. When the signature is detected, pan the
antenna through the peak signal level and locate the first minima to
the left and right of the peak.
Note the number of turns of the adjusting screw between the
minima, actual peak signal is EXACTLY half way between the two
minima.
3. Pan the antenna in the vertical plane in the same manner as above,
when complete lock the antenna panning bars and secure.

4.4.2.1 AGC Current Monitoring
AGC current of Main 1 channel (W1 CH) Main/SD receiver can be
monitored through the connector CN34 of SCSU for antenna alignment
and future troubleshooting.
Table 4.2 - AGC Current Monitoring Terminal
CN34 of SCSU for HK1
Pin No. Name Function
9 SDA SG Signal Ground for Monitor
8 SD AGC SD AGC monitor (W1)
7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
6 AGC MON AGC monitor (W1)

CN34 of SCSU accommodates housekeeping (external)
supervisory/control terminals in addition to AGC monitoring.
37
20
1
19

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-17
4.4.2.2 Antenna XPIC Optimization
1. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the Horizontal waveguide, look for
the signature of the distant site, the level should be at least 30 dB
below the received signal level of the Vertical polarization. Typically,
the receive level will be 35 dBm therefore the cross polar receive
level should be 65 dB or less.
2. Rotate the feed point on the antenna ( both at the local and remote
sites ) to achieve maximum cross polar discrimination, the preferred
level is > 35 dB (antenna specification for HPX10-44D is > 30 dB).
3. Lock the feed mounting hub after achieving maximum cross polar
discrimination.
4.4.3 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms
The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F
installation. Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance
and Turn-Up procedures.
SRT 1F
4-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.5 SRT 1F In-Station Performance Tests
This chapter provides instructions for In Station Testing of the SRT 1F
radio equipment.
4.5.1 Hardware Settings
4.5.1.1 Default Values
This section describes each hardware setting for the SRT 1F radio.
These hardware settings are used only for Siemens factory
option.These hardware settings should not be touched unless otherwise
specified.
4.5.2 Provisioning (Software Settings)
4.5.2.1 Default Values
These provisioning items allow the user to make permanent changes in
the NE.
Do not change these provisioning settings unless otherwise specified.
Caution: Caution: Caution: Caution:
Default values displayed on LCT screens are initial setting values for Default values displayed on LCT screens are initial setting values for Default values displayed on LCT screens are initial setting values for Default values displayed on LCT screens are initial setting values for
hardware/software des hardware/software des hardware/software des hardware/software design, but not for your system setting. ign, but not for your system setting. ign, but not for your system setting. ign, but not for your system setting.
If you select Default values on a LCT screen accidentally, the system If you select Default values on a LCT screen accidentally, the system If you select Default values on a LCT screen accidentally, the system If you select Default values on a LCT screen accidentally, the system
might not function properly. might not function properly. might not function properly. might not function properly.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-19
4.5.3 Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency
This test is to check the TX local OSC frequency of MSTU unit.
4.5.3.1 Equipment Required
HP5342A Frequency counter or equivalent
LCT (Local terminal)
4.5.3.2 Specification
Tolerance Within 10 ppm.

Figure 4-11 - TX Local Frequency Measurement
BRU
M
S
T
U

1
M
S
T
U

2
M
S
T
U

3
M
S
T
U

4
M
S
T
U

6
M
S
T
U

5
M
S
T
U

7
M
S
T
U

8
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V
IN
- V
IN
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
SCSU
BBIU

ON
OFF
TX F MON
POWER
ON/OFF

Frequency
Counter
SRT 1F
4-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.5.3.3 Test Procedure
1. Allow the frequency counter at least 30 minutes to warm up.
2. The BAND SELECT SW on the frequency counter shall be set to the
specified frequency band (RF band).
3. Set up the test circuit as shown in Figure 4-11.
4. Record the TX local carrier frequency results.
5. Compare the results with Table 4.3.
Table 4.3 - TX Local OSC Frequency for example (5 GHz Band)
RF CH No RF Frequency
(MHz)
LO Frequency
(MHz)
Tolerance (kHz)
10 ppm
1 4430.0 3586.0 35.9
2 4470.0 3626.0 36.3
3 4510.0 3666.0 36.7
4 4550.0 3706.0 37.1
5 4590.0 3746.0 37.5
6 4630.0 3786.0 37.9
7 4670.0 3826.0 38.3
1 4730.0 3886.0 38.9
2 4770.0 3926.0 39.3
3 4810.0 3966.0 39.7
4 4850.0 4006.0 40.1
5 4890.0 4046.0 40.5
6 4930.0 4086.0 40.9
7 4970.0 4126.0 41.3

Note: Other radio frequency should be referred to the par. Frequency
Plan and Antenna System.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-21
4.5.4 Transmit Output Power Level
This test is to check the output power of the TX unit.
HP436A/HP8481A Power meter with sensor or equivalent.
HP8491A Fixed attenuator (30dB) or equivalent.
LCT
TX output power* +32 dBm 1 dB for 4 GHz to L8 GHz band
TX output power* +29 dBm 1 dB for 11 GHz band
TX output power* +27 dBm 1 dB for 13 GHz band
* TX output power is specified at MSTU output port
BBIU
SCSU
BRU
T LO
PSW
T LO
PSW
T LO
PSW
T LO
PSW
SD RX IN
TX OUT
SMA Connector
MN RX IN

Figure 4-12 - TX Output Power Measurement
Top view of MSTU Adapter
ATT
30 dB
POWER
METER
+30 ~ -30 dBm / 50
SRT 1F
4-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
TX Output Power Measurement Procedure
1. Turn off power SW of the MSTU.
2. Remove the TX OUT cable
3. Connect power meter into the TX OUT.
If the maximum range of the power meter is less than the rated
output power level of the TX, insert fixed and calibrated attenuator
between the TX output and the power meter.
4. Turn on power SW of the MSTU.
5. Read the power meter indication.
6. If the measured power is out of the rated level, log-on LCT.
7. Change the equipment to Maintenance state.
Menu
Status Control / Maintenance Radio Interface / Change
Maintenance State
Action Maintenance (MT)
Access ID RSPI RADIO SIDE

8. Adjust TX output power.
Menu
Status Control / Maintenance Radio Interface / Transmit
Power Adjustment
Action Operate
Access ID GPn-Wn-MSTU
Adjustment Item TXPWR
UP/DOWN Choice UP or DOWN
Mode Choice Coarse or Fine

9. Log off
Note: TX output power is specified at MSTU output port, and the measurement value
at the MSTU Adapter should be revised by the following equation
TX output power = Measurement value + MSTU Adapter loss
Band Adapter loss (dB)
4G 0.30
U4G 0.30
5G 0.30
L6G 0.45
U6G 0.50
L7G 0.55
U7G 0.60
8G 0.65
11G 0.70
13G 0.80
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-23
4.5.5 Transmit Spectrum
This test checks the TX Spectrum
Spectrum Analyzer.
0
dB
dB
+ 10
- 10
- 80
- 70
- 60
- 50
- 40
- 30
- 20
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
RF Frequency (MHz)
27.5MHz
- 35 dB
42.5MHz
- 65 dB
17.5 MHz
+ 1 dB
64 QAM, 40 MHz spacing
0
+ 1.0
+ 1.0
+ 10
- 10
- 80
- 70
- 60
- 50
- 40
- 30
- 20
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
RF Frequency (MHz)
21 MHz
- 35 dB
31.5 MHz
- 65 dB
13 MHz
+ 1 dB
128 QAM, 28, 29, 30 MHz spacing

Figure 4-13 - Transmitter Output Spectrum
SPAN = 200 MHz
RES BW = 100 KHz
VBW = 300 Hz
SPAN = 200 MHz
RES BW = 100 KHz
VBW = 300 Hz
SRT 1F
4-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
1. Turn off all MSTU Power SWs.
2. Remove the TX output cable (thick line on Figure 4-14) from the
circulator on the TX BPF in BRU unit.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the circulator output.
4. Turn on the Power SW of the MTSU under test.
5. Compare the results to the specification (use Delta markers or
mask)
6. Turn off the Power SW for next channel measurement.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for other channels
8. Restore the connections.
9. Turn on all MSTU power SWs.


P
R
O
T

S
D

R
X
M
A
I
N
-
1

S
D

R
X
P
R
O
T

R
X
M
A
I
N
-
1

R
X
P
R
O
T

T
X
M
A
I
N
-
1

T
X
C
H

3
R
X

B
P
F
T
X

B
P
F
R
X

B
P
F
C
H

1
C
H

3
C
H

1
C
H

3
C
H

1
MAIN (V) SD (V)

B R U
Transduser
Dummy Load Circulator
P
R
O
T

S
D

R
X
M
A
I
N
-
1

S
D

R
X
P
R
O
T

R
X
M
A
I
N
-
1

R
X
P
R
O
T

T
X
M
A
I
N
-
1

T
X
C
H

3
R
X

B
P
F
T
X

B
P
F
R
X

B
P
F
C
H

1
C
H

3
C
H

1
C
H

3
C
H

1
MAIN (V) SD (V)

B R U
Transduser
Circulator

Figure 4-14 - Set-up of Transmit Spectrum Measurement
ON
OFF
TX F MON
POWER
ON/OFF

MSTU Front View
Example of detail configuration of BRU for 1+1, with SD System
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-25
4.5.6 Receiver (RX) AGC Range
This test is to check the AGC range of MAIN RX and SD RX
independently. This test should be carried out after the IF output level
test, and for that reason the IF output test has been included.
0 to 80 dB RF attenuator and coaxial cables for RF and IF.
HP436A/HP8483A Power meter with sensor or equivalent
LCT
1. Remove the SD RX IN cable if SD configured.
2. Connect the attenuator between the MN RX IN and the MAIN RF
output of the branching filter.
3. Set the ITEM No. rotary switch on front panel of the MSTU to
position E.
4. Adjust the attenuator slowly increasing the attenuation until the
specified RSL(-77 dBm for 64 QAM and 128 QAM).
5. Confirm the IF output level of the XPIC OUT remains within the limits
(-10 dBm +1 dB / -2 dB).
6. Restore the connections and ITEM No. switch to 0.
(SD configuration only.)
7. Remove the MN RX IN cable.
8. Connect the attenuator between the SD RX IN and the SD RF
output of the branching filter.
9. Set the ITEM No. rotary switch on front panel of the MSTU to
position E.
10. Adjust the attenuator slowly increasing the attenuation until the
specified RSL.
11. Confirm the IF output level of the XPIC OUT remains within the
limits.
12. Restore the connections and ITEM No. switch to 0.

SRT 1F
4-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

ON
OFF
TX F MON
POWER
ON/OFF

P
R
O
T

S
D

R
X

M
A
I
N
-
1

S
D

R
X

P
R
O
T

R
X

M
A
I
N
-
1

R
X

P
R
O
T

T
X

M
A
I
N
-
1

T
X

C
H

3

R
X

B
P
F

T
X

B
P
F

R
X

B
P
F

C
H

1

C
H

3

C
H

1

C
H

3

C
H

1

MAIN (V) SD (V)
B R
Transducer
IF POWER METER
Variable
Attenuator
0 ~ 80 dB
M
N

I
F

O
U
T

SD IF OUT
MSTU Front View

Figure 4-15 - Set-up of AGC Range Measurement

From SD Antenna From Main Antenna
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-27
4.5.7 Optical Output Power Level
This test describes the Optional Characteristics tests for the SRT 1F
radio equipment.
Optical Power Meter
S-1.1 L-1.1
8~15dBm 0~5dBm

To measure the Optical Output Power of OPT INTF unit.
Provisioning IS (for all units)
ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) OFF

1. Clean and inspect the optical connections.
2. Connect the optical power meter to the optical signal output of the
OPT INTF unit through the SC optical fiber.
3. Verify that the optical output power complies with the specification.
4. Record the results.
5. Repeat for all OPT INTF units.

SRT 1F
4-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

BRU
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V
IN
- V
IN
- V
IN
- V
IN
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
BBIU
SCSU
M
S
T
U

1
M
S
T
U

2
M
S
T
U

3
M
S
T
U

4
M
S
T
U

6
M
S
T
U

5
M
S
T
U

7
M
S
T
U

8
I
N
I
N
I
N
I
N
O
U
T
O
U
T
O
U
T
O
U
T
Optical cable
Connector
To/from Unit
STM-1 Optical Signal
Optical Power
Meter

Figure 4-16 - Optical Output Power Measurement
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-29
4.5.8 Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level
This test is to measure the minimum (MIM) and maximum (MAX) optical
receive levels of the SRT 1F radio.
To measure the receive levels:
1. Maintain the optical attenuator set-up.
2. Slowly increase the optical attenuation until the LINE LED glows.
This indicates that the B2 MIN alarm threshold has been crossed.
3. Reduce the attenuation by 1 dB to remove the alarm.
Note: The B2 alarm will not clear immediately, allow time for the alarm to clear before
proceeding.
4. Remove the patchcord from the receiver and connect it into the
optical power meter.
5. Use LCT to override the safety interlock. (Status/ControlControl
PanelALS Release)
6. Click on the OK command button to fire the laser for 90 seconds.
7. Record the measurement in the Data Recording Forms.
Note: The following steps are optional. They check that the maximum input level to the
OPT INTF unit (according to the specification) does not overload the optical
receiver.
8a. For OPT INTFL11, decrease the attenuation until a 10 dBm is
read on the power meter. (Approximately 8 dB attenuation.)
8b. For OPT INTFS11, decrease the attenuation until a 8 dBm is
read on the power meter. (Approximately 0 dB attenuation.)
9. Disconnect the patchcord from the power meter and reconnect it to
the receiver.
10. Verify that the B2 MIN alarm has cleared, and the PRBS is error-
free, indicating that the OPT INTF complies with the specification.
11. Record the results in the Data Recording Forms.
12. Adjust the optical attenuator to 15 dB.
13. Repeat the procedure from Step 2 for the remaining OPT INTF
units.
SRT 1F
4-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

BRU
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

Y
O
P
T

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
- V
IN
- V
IN
- V
IN
- V
IN
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
BBIU
SCSU
M
S
T
U

1
M
S
T
U

2
M
S
T
U

3
M
S
T
U

4
M
S
T
U

6
M
S
T
U

5
M
S
T
U

7
M
S
T
U

8
I
N
O
U
T
Optical cable
Connector
To/from Unit
I
N
O
U
T
Optical cable
Connector
To/from Unit
Variable
Attenuator
Optical Power
Meter
OPT INTF Y OPT INTF X

Figure 4-17 - Optical Receive Levels Test Set Up
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-31
4.5.9 External Clock Supply
This test checks the SRT 1F radio external clock supply.
Refer to the warning messages detailed in par. 4.3.
For equipment configured for external or tributary timing only. To test
the external clock:
1. Supply an external 2 MHz clock source compliant to ITU-T
Recommendation to EXT CLK IN coaxial connector CN1 or CN2
located on SCSU BWB, feed a frequency counter with the same
source.
2. Connect another frequency counter to the T0 CLK OUT coaxial
connector CN 5 or CN 6 located on SCSU connection area.
3. If external timing is used, disconnect the clock primary and
secondary sources from the SRT 1F. Verify that an alarm appears
on the local terminal (LCT).

SRT 1F
4-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

PDU(OPTION)
BRU
M
S
T
U

1
[ P P P P ]
M
S
T
U

2
[M1 M1 M1 M1]
M
S
T
U

3
[M2 M2 M2 M2]
M
S
T
U

4
[M3 M3 M3 M3]
M
S
T
U

6
[M5 M5 M5 M5]
M
S
T
U

5
[M4 M4 M4 M4]
M
S
T
U

7
[M6 M6 M6 M6]
M
S
T
U

8
[M7 M7 M7 M7]
B
B

I
N
T
F

P
B
B
C
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
B
B

I
N
T
F

Y
B
B

I
N
T
F

X
M
S
P
S
W

7
M
S
P
S
W
6
M
S
P
S
W

5
M
S
P
S
W

4
M
S
P
S
W

3
M
S
P
S
W

2
M
S
P
S
W

1
O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
CN 35
CN 34
CN 33
CN 45
CN 43
CN 44
CN 42
CN 41
CN 40
C
N

5
C
N

4
C
N

3
C
N

2
- V
IN
- V
IN
- V
IN
- V
IN
C
N

1
C
N

6
8
CN 73
CN 74
C
N

6
5
C
N

6
6
C
N

6
7
CN 32
CN 24
CN 23
CN 11
CN 12 CN 31
CN 22
CN 21 CN 13
CN 14
CN 15
CN 17
CN 16
CN 77
CN 76 CN 75
CN 78 CN 79
CN 72
C
N

1
1
C
N

1
0
C
N

1
2
C
N

9
C
N

8
C
N

7
C
N

6
BBIU
SCSU

Figure 4-18 - External Clock Frequency Measurement
CN 11
CN 6 CN 4
CN 5 CN 3
CN 2
CN 1
Detail
Frequency
Counter
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-33
4.5.10 Rack Alarm Test
This test checks the rack alarms.
Multi Meter
4.5.10.2 Test procedure
Generate warning, minor, major and critical alarms.*
1

*
1
Example of simuler alarm generation.
This is an example to generate a simuler alarm using a HK input. Follow the
steps:
1. Set the alarm attribute of a HK input to CR.
Menu Provisioning / System / Set Housekeeping Alarm
Action Set
Access ID Choose anything one
Alarm Severity Check CHANGE and choose CR
Alarm Type NO CHANGE
Alarm Message NO CHANGE

2. Sort the selected AID port of HK.
3. Repeat for all alarm severity.
4. Restore the HK port alarm setting.
Confirm contact closure with the multi-meter (relevant pin connected to
ground).
Apply closure to the alarm ACO input and confirm the ACO activation.

4.5.10.3 Interface Specification

INPUT I = 0.3 mA to 11.3 mA

OUTPUT I
MAX
= 100 mA
V
MAX
= 110 V (DC)
SRT 1F
4-34 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Figure 4-19 - Rack Alarm Bus Test Set-Up
Table 4.4 - Rack Alarm Bus pin assign and interface logic
Pin
No.
Name Description Alarm Power down
1 FG Frame Ground
2 AUD CR Audible Critical alarm CLOSE OPEN
3 VIS CR Visible Critical alarm CLOSE CLOSE
4 AUD MJ Audible Major alarm CLOSE OPEN
5 VIS MJ Visible Major alarm CLOSE OPEN
6 AUD MN Audible Miner alarm CLOSE OPEN
7 VIS MN Visible Miner alarm CLOSE OPEN
8 COMMON Common
9 AUD WN Audible Warning CLOSE OPEN
10 VIS WN Visible Warning CLOSE OPEN
11 RAB-MNT Maintenance CLOSE OPEN
12 NE ALM-C NE Alarm (C)
13 NE ALM-N NE Alarm (N)
CLOSE OPEN
14 ACC IN Alarm Cut Off In
15 *ACC IN ACO Ground
Cut off = CLOSE

NE ALM = (CR) OR (MJ) OR (MN) OR (WR)

Rack Alarm BUS
Output
+Vcc
Photo
Coupler
ACO IN
+Vcc
CN 31 on
SCSU BWB
Radio Equipment
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L R
NE ALM-N
NE ALM-C
VIS CR
AUD CR
VIS MJ
AUD MJ
VIS MN
AUD MN
VIS WN
AUD WN
RAB -MNT
COMMON
Primary
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-35
4.6 SRT 1F Inter-Station Tests
This chapter details the procedures to be carried out after In-Station
tests have been completed and the SRT 1F has been connected to the
network.
ATTENTION
DO NOT attempt to re-tune any adjustment point, if the test result
complies with the specification.
4.6.1 Receive (RX) Signal Level
This test is meant to confirm the result of antenna alignment by
measuring the RF receiving level at the input of MSTU.
LCT
RF Power Meter
1. Confirm the ATPC setting of the TX site state (ATPC = high is
recommended).
2. Remove MN and SD RF connection between the branching network
and RX.
3. Connect the Power meter to the RX branching network main output.
4. Compare the result with the path calculations. Results should be
within 1.5 dB approximately.
5. Compare the result with the value shown by LCT (Menu DISPLAY
CURRENT LEVEL)
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for SD.
7. Repeat for other bearer/s (PROT, M1 etc.)
Please note that LCT accuracy is 3 dB with the received field in the
range between 35 and 65 dB.
SRT 1F
4-36 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.6.2 IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Instruments:
Link Analyser, adapters, IF & RF cables, fixed & variable attenuators.
Proceeding:
Connect the Tx Link Analyser to 70M IN of MSTU in the remote station
and the Rx Link Analyser to XPIC OUT of MSTU in the nearend station
as show in Figure 4-20, set as follow
Link TX Settings
Baseband Frequency 250KHz
Deviation 250KHz
Sweep width 12.0 MHz
IF Frequency 70.00 MHz
IF Level 10.0 dBm

Change the status of Rx equipment from In service to Maintenance
by LCT.
Choose Status/Control Change Maintenance State and select
the MSTU. The Change Maintenance State dialog box appears.
Select RSPI and the action Maintenance and click OK.
If Space Diversity system is applied, this test should be done for MAIN
receiver and SD receiver independently.
MAIN RX
1. Remove the SD RX RF cable.
2. In the received side set the ITEM No. rotary switch to B position.
3. Set the Frequency Measurement of Rx side by FLEXR. Choose
State/Control Maintenance Radio Interface Radio Physical
Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the dialog box appears.
4. Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency Measurement
and click OK.
5. The amplitude response and the group delay curve are displayed on
RX link analyser.
6. If the RX link analyser is not locked, confirm that the XPIC OUT
level is whitin the limit (10dBm1dB). If the output level is not
comply with the tolerance adjust the level by LCT.
7. In absence of fading and reflections, check that the amplitude
response and the group delay of the main receiver are within the
limits.
8. If the amplitude response does not comply with the limits, use the
INCR/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the
amplitude is whitin the limits. Performed this operation with ITEM
No. rotary switch in the B position.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-37
9. If the group delay response does not comply with the limits, use the
INC/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the
No. rotary switch in the following position:
ITEM No.2 : DELAY-HIGH (for adjustment of higher frequency)
ITEM No.3 : DELAY-MIDDLE (for adjustment of middle
frequency)
ITEM No.4 : DELAY-LOW (for adjustment of low frequency)
10. To memorizing the new value set the ITEM No. rotary switch in 9
position and push the INCR/DECR buttons simultaneosly. After that,
reset the ITEM No. rotary switch to 0.
11. Connect the SD RX RF cable.
12. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and
Release the Frequency Measurement.
13. Change the status of Rx equipment from Maintenance to In
service by LCT.
SD RX
14. Remove the MN RX RF cable.
15. In the received side set the ITEM No. rotary switch to B position.
16. Set the Frequency Measurement of Rx side by LCT. Choose
State/Control Maintenance Radio Interface Radio Physical
Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the dialog box appears.
17. Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency Measurement
and click OK.
18. The amplitude response and the group delay curve are displeyed on
RX link analyser.
19. If the RX link analyser is not locked, confirm that the XPIC OUT
level is whitin the limit (10dBm1dB). If the output level is not
comply with the tolerance adjust the level by LCT.
20. In absence of fading and reflections, check that the amplitude
response and the group delay of the diversity receiver are within the
limits.
21. If the amplitude response does not comply with the limits, adjust it
by LCT.
Choose Status/Control Maintenance Radio Interface RSPI
adjustment.
Click a selectable unit, then click anywhere else on the shelf. The
RSPI Adjustment dialog box appears
Select the Adjustment Item SDSLOPE to modify the IF
response.
Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK.
22. If the group delay response does not comply with the limits, use the
INC/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the
SRT 1F
4-38 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
No. rotary switch in the following position:
ITEM No.2 : DELAY-HIGH (for adjustment of higher frequency)
ITEM No.3 : DELAY-MIDDLE (for adjustment of middle
frequency)
ITEM No.4 : DELAY-LOW (for adjustment of low frequency)
23. To memorizing the new value set the ITEM No. rotary switch in 9
position and push the INCR/DECR buttons simultaneosly. After that,
reset the ITEM No. rotary switch to 0.
24. Connect the MN RX RF cable.
25. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and
Release the Frequency Measurement.
26. Change the status of Rx equipment from Maintenance to In service
by LCT.
NOTE: In the 128 QAM system, the IF adaptive equaliser D-EQL is
used according to the BRU system. Please refers to the following
table:

CH arrangement Adjacent Channel D-EQL code
Interleaved None CT DLEQ-1161-SOSHIN
Co-Channel One adjacent Upper CT DLEQ-1235-SOSHIN
Co-Channel Two adjacent CT DLEQ-1234-SOSHIN
Co-Channel One adjacent Lower CT DLEQ-1236-SOSHIN

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-39

ON

OFF
TX F MON
POWER
ON/OFF
Microwave Link
Analyzer
(Receiver)
Microwave Link
Analyzer
(Transmitter)
SD IF MON
DADE setting for SD
XPIC OUT
IF IN
MAIN IF MON

ON

OFF
TX F MON
POWER
ON/OFF
IF Adp. Equal. D-EQL
INCR
DECR
ITEM No. ROTARY SW

Figure 4-20 Test bench for IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE

RX SIDE TX SIDE
SRT 1F
4-40 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.6.3 SPACE DIVERSITY EQUALIZATION
Instruments:
Link Analyser, Spectrum Analyser, adapters, IF & RF cables, fixed &
variable attenuators.
Proceeding:
1. Connect the Tx Link Analyser to 70M IN of MSTU in the remote
station and the Rx Link Analyser to XPIC OUT of MSTU in the
nearend station, set as follow:

Link TX Settings
Baseband Frequency 250KHz
Deviation 250KHz
Sweep width 2.0 MHz
IF Frequency 70.00 MHz
IF Level 10.0 dBm

2. Select ATPC transmitters function as ATPC function OFF and
transmitting to maximum level (ATPC HIGH).
3. Change the status of Rx equipment from In service to
Maintenance by LCT.
Choose Status/Control Change Maintenance State
and select the MSTU. The Change Maintenance State
dialog box appears (Figure 4-21).
Select RSPI and the action Maintenance and click OK.

Figure 4-21 Change Maintenance State dialog box

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-41
4. Set the Frequency Measurement in the Rx equipment by LCT.
Choose State/Control Maintenance Radio Interface
Radio Physical Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the
dialog box appears (Figure 4-22).
Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency
Measurement and click OK.

Figure 4-22 - Radio Physical Interface dialog box

5. Set the ITEM No. rotary switch in position B in the Rx station.
6. Confirm that the following output level is whitin the limit:
XPIC OUT 10dBm1db
7. If the output level is not comply with the tolerance adjust the level by
LCT.
Choose Status/Control Maintenance Radio Interface
RSPI adjustment.
Select the Adjustment Item RX IF GAIN to modify the
XPIC OUT.
Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click
OK.
8. Set the SD DADE ON and EPS OFF by LCT in Rx station.
Choose State/Control Maintenance Radio Interface
Maintenance for SD. Select the MSTU unit and the
Maintenance for SD dialog box appears (Figure 4-23).
Select the Action Operate and the Item SD DADE ON
and click OK.
Select the Action Operate and the Item EPS OFF and
click OK

SRT 1F
4-42 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 4-23 - Maintenance for SD dialog box

9. To display the two tracks on the Rx link analyser turn the ITEM No.
rotary switch in position 0 and after than in position B again. The
difference between the 2 tracks of group delay visualised represents
delay T between Main and diversitys received signals (due to
waveguide path difference).
10. Confirm that the delay difference displayed on the Microwave Link
Analyzer is less than 2 ns.
If the delay difference is not less than 2 ns, change the delay line
for IF DADE so as to achieve the difference of 2 ns. The green
jumpers are used to introduce the delay on Diversity way. The
green jumpers in default position (vertical) does not introduced
delay, put it in horizontal position to introduce the delay. Please
refer to following picture (Figure 4-24):

Figure 4-24
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-43
11. Enter in the Maintenance for SD dialog box by LCT and select the
Action Release and the Item SD DADE ON and click OK. In the
same dialog box select the Action Release and the Item EPS OFF
and click OK
Finally to complete equalisation, a compensation of the signal amplitude
entering the combiner has to be done as reported.
1. Remove the SD RX RF input cable.
2. Confirm that the following output levels are within the limits:
MN 70M OUT 10dBm1dB
XPIC OUT 10dBm1dB
3. If the output levels are not comply with the tolerances adjust the
levels by LCT.
RSPI adjustment. Select the MSTU unit and the RSPI
Adjustment dialog box appears (Figure 4-25).

Figure 4-25 Radio Physical Interface dialog box

Select the Adjustment Item RX RF GAIN to modify the
MN 70M OUT.
OK.
Select the Adjustment Item RX IF GAIN to modify the
XPIC OUT.
OK.
SRT 1F
4-44 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4. Replace the SD RX RF input cable and remove the MAIN RX RF
input cable.
5. Confirm that the following output levels are within the limits:
SD 70M OUT 10dBm1dB
XPIC OUT 10dBm1dB
6. If the output levels are not comply with the tolerances adjust the
levels by LCT.
RSPI adjustment.
Click a selectable unit, then click anywhere else on the
shelf. The RSPI Adjustment dialog box appears.
Select the Adjustment Item RX RF GAIN to modify the
SD 70M OUT.
Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required.
Select the Adjustment Item SD GAIN to modify the XPIC
OUT.
Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required
7. Set the ITEM No. rotary switch in position 0in the Rx station.
8. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and Release
the Frequency Measurement.
9. Change the status of Rx equipment from Maintenance to In service
by LCT.
10. Replace the MAIN RX RF input cable.
Repeate the same procedure for all MSTU units equipped.
Note: In the SRT1F equipment it is possible to compensate a static
delay between Main and Diversity antenna only to inserted a delay
on diversity way. The max delay compensable is 120nsec.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-45
4.6.4 ATPC Test (End to End LAB Test)
This test is meant to measure the ATPC. (End to End Lab Test)
Variable RF attenuator
LCT
1. Remove RF IN, MAIN and SD cables.
2. Insert the variable attenuator between the MAIN RF OUT of the
branching network and MAIN RF input of the RX.
3. Adjust for minimum attenuation.
4. Check on LCT for the TX power level at the remote site by:
Status/control Shelf condition Select TX, M1 / PROT
5. Increase the attenuation for RSL ATPC activation point from the
NORMAL POWER to the HIGH POWER (45, 55 or 65 dBm
selectable)
6. Repeat step 4 and check for HIGH POWER
7. Remove the attenuator. The NORMAL POWER is dynamic varying
the level due to the propagation loss.
8. Repeat step 4 and check for no alarm (normal)
9. Restore connections.
SRT 1F
4-46 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

ON
OFF
TX F MON
POWER
ON/OFF

P
R
O
T

S
D

R
X

M
A
I
N
-
1

S
D

R
X

P
R
O
T

R
X

M
A
I
N
-
1

R
X

P
R
O
T

T
X

M
A
I
N
-
1

T
X

C
H

3

R
X

B
P
F

T
X

B
P
F

R
X

B
P
F

C
H

1

C
H

3

C
H

1

C
H

3

C
H

1

MAIN (V) SD (V)
B R
Transducer
Variable
Attenuator
0 ~ 80 dB

Figure 4-26 - ATPC Test Set-Up
Remote Station
Transmitter
MAIN ANTENNA
SD ANTENNA
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-47
4.7 SRT 1F End to End Station Performance Tests
This chapter provides instructions for end to end station testing of the
SRT 1F radio.
4.7.1 Remote NE Management via DCC
4.7.1.1 DCC configuration
Note : The following settings have to be applied to both Local and
Remote NE
Connect to the NE using LCT. To enable DCC choose Provisioning
Facility Set Base Band Interface Set OHB, the dialog box
reported in Figure 4-27 appears.

Figure 4-27

Select Action Edit, STM1RS, J0 Byte = N, E1 Byte = Y, D1-D3 Byte
= Y, B1 Byte = Y then click OK.
Select Provisioning Section DCC SDCC SS, the dialog box in
Figure 4-28 appears.

SRT 1F
4-48 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 4-28

Select Action Edit, Access ID = GP1-W1-R-RS, Service State = In
Service then click OK, when prompted to select Action Initialize click
Cancel.
Repeat the last command choosing GP1-W1-L-RS as Access ID
In the same dialog box choose Action Initialize then click OK
Now LAPD parameters have to be set choose Provisioning
Section DCC LAPD Parameters. The dialog box in Figure 4-29 is
shown.

Figure 4-29
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-49
Select Access ID = GP1-W1-R-RS, leave as default all the other
parameters, or for the LAPD Cmd/Rsp only choose the correct
setting according to Table 1 then click OK, when prompted to select
Action Initialize click Cancel.
Repeat the last command choosing GP1-W1-L-RS as Access ID
In the same dialog box choose Action Initialize then click OK
Table 4.5 - Presettings
Local NE Remote NE
PLUS-R (*) PLUS-R (*)
PLUS-C PLUS-C
USER (**) NETWORK (**)

* Default Setting
** Use USER/NETWORK only for interworking with other vendor
Note: The Initialize command can take up to 2-3 minutes, please wait
until command completion.

4.7.1.2 Test

Perform all the tests reported in the list below and mark the
appropriate box in the Test Report .

1. Login to the Local NE
2. Login to the Remote NE

Note: In order to Login to the Remote NE, its NE ID must be added in
the access list, after the login command and after the serial port
parameters acceptance, the dialog box reported in Figure 4-30 is
shown.

SRT 1F
4-50 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 4-30

Type the NE Id in the Enter NE ID field then click Add NE ID, enter
username and password then click OK.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-51
4.7.2 Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test
To check the operation of the Radio Protection Switch function.
LCT
MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent
Patch cords, attenuators and cables.
1. Remove MAIN and SD RX, RF input cable.
2. Insert variable attenuator between MAIN RX, RF INPUT and RF
OUTPUT of RX BPF of BRU.
3. Configure test equipment as per Figure 4-31
4. Confirm error free transmission prior to start testing
(5 minute test).
5. Increase the attenuation of the ATT slowly and confirm, via LCT that
a radio protection switch by USW has occurred.
Note: Confirm that the switch occurs at the threshold set by LCT
6. Confirm that the SDH analyzer is error free.
7. Decrease the attenuation of the ATT slowly and confirm, via LCT
that a radio protection switch has restored.
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 for the other MAIN channels (if fitted).
10. Via LCT, perform a manual switch of USW for MAIN 1.
12. Release the manual switch.
13. Confirm switch reversion and error free.
14. Repeat steps 10 to 14 for all main bearers (if fitted)
SRT 1F
4-52 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
SCSU
SDH Analyzer
STM-1(CMI) IN
STM-1(CMI) OUT
WS
BSW unit

Figure 4-31 - Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test Set-Up
(in case of STM-1 CMI electric signal)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-53
4.7.3 Way Side Test
This section covers the test procedures for the Way Side function.
These tests are:
Way Side Transmission Test
Way Side Characteristics Test
RF variable attenuator
Error ratio test set for 2 Mbit/s
MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent
4.7.3.2 Way Side Transmission Test

Provisioning IS (In Service) for all units

WS Enable (WS1, WS2) for PROT and M1 NE
Clock M1 Line sync

1. Input the 2.048 Mbit/s signal to the 75 port of the BSW unit, and
confirm that there is no error at the receiving side. This test shall be
carried out on both CH of WS1 and WS2.
2. In the same way, confirm 120 input/output port is error free.

SRT 1F
4-54 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

O
C
C

I
N
T
F
H
K

2
H
K

1
T
C
U

Y
T
C
U

X
B
S
W

7
B
S
W

6
B
S
W

5
B
S
W

4
B
S
W

3
B
S
W

2
B
S
W

1
S
V
E
C
U

2
E
C
U

1
SCSU
SDH Analyzer
STM-1(CMI) IN
STM-1(CMI) OUT
BSW unit
PCM Analyzer
WS:2.048 Mb/s IN
WS:2.048 Mb/s OUT WS(SOH) IN
WS(SOH) OUT
WS(RFCOH) IN
WS(RFCOH) OUT

Figure 4-32 - Way Side Transmission Test Set-Up
(In case that line impedance is 75 .)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-55
4.7.4 BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test)
This BER Characteristic is a lab test.
MP1550A SDH analyzer or equivalent.
Variable RF attenuator
Up fade BER=10
-3
or better (at RSL

= 17dBm)
Down fade See Figure 4-34
Test Procedure
Provisioning IS (In Service) for all units

1. Calibrate the RF variable attenuator vs. receiving level.
2. Measure the BER payload (VC4), and confirm that the BER
characteristics meet the required specification.

SRT 1F
4-56 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

SCSU
PROT M-1 M-2
BSW unit
SDH Analyzer
STM-1(CMI) IN
STM-1(CMI) OUT
SCSU
SDH Analyzer
STM-1(CMI) IN
STM-1(CMI) OUT
PROT M-1 M-2
BSW unit

Figure 4-33 - BER Test Set-Up
Variable
Attenuator
STM-1
ANALYZER
STM-1
ANALYZER
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-57
Figure 4-34 shows the Down Fade BER Characteristics
- 78 - 76 - 74 - 72 - 70 - 68 dBm
10
- 6
10
- 4
10
- 5
10
- 3

(a) Down Fade BER Characteristics of 64 QAM system
- 76 - 74 - 72 - 70 - 68 - 66 dBm
10
- 6
10
- 4
10
- 5
10
- 3

(b) Down Fade BER Characteristics of 128 QAM system

Figure 4-34 - Down Fade BER Characteristics
BER = 10
- 3
at RSL = - 74.5 dBm
Guaranteed Curve
Typical Curve
BER = 10
- 6
at RSL = - 70.5 dBm
BER = 10
- 3
at RSL = - 72 dBm
BER = 10
- 6
at RSL = - 68 dBm
Typical Curve
Guaranteed Curve
Receive Signal Level
BER
Receive Signal Level
BER
SRT 1F
4-58 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.7.5 BACKGROUND BER TEST
Instruments:
SDH Data Transmission Analyser with S1 byte facility, BB cables
Procedure:
Connect the DTA to the SRT-1F in a station, inserting a BaseBand
signal loop in remote station, select a STM-1 signal (with VC-4 unframed
140 M/s payload) select correct synch source and let the system
recording for 12 hours (or different depending on Customer
requirements).
In case of problem during recording test, identify the affected direction
using another DTA and through other tests identify responsible unit,
replace it and repeat the test.
Caution: The radio equipment should be synchronizes before to perform
this test.
To synchronize the hop perform the following step:
In the local station connect the DTA to the radio and set the byte S1
to 0010 (G.811)
In the local station by LCT choose Provisioning Set
Synchronization Set Sync Mode and the following dialog box
appears (Figure 4-35).
Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 and click OK

Figure 4-35 Set Sync Mode dialog box

Choose Provisioning Set Synchronization Set Sync Parameter
and the following dialog box appears (Figure 4-36).
Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU and EC Priority
1 = GP1-W1-L (STM1 channel1) and click OK.
In the same dialog box select the action Retrieve and click OK to
control if the Radio is sync. with STM1.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-59

Figure 4-36 Set Sync Parameter dialog box

In the remote station by LCT choose Provisioning Set
Synchronization Set Sync Mode Figure 4-35 appear.
Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 and click OK.
Choose Provisioning Set Synchronization Set Sync Parameter
and the Figure 4-36 appears.
Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU and EC Priority
1 = GP1-W1-R (DEM channel 1) and click OK.
In the same dialog box select the action Retrieve and click OK to
control if the Radio is sync. with DEM 1.

Caution: The above parameter is used only to perform the Background
BER test. Every in service equipment should be configured according to
the sync. planning.
SRT 1F
4-60 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.7.6 Synchronization
4.7.6.1 Clock Sources selection
Connect to the NE using LCT. Choose Provisioning System
Set
Synchronization Set Sync Mode, the following dialog box appears
(Figure 4-37).
Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 then click OK

Figure 4-37
Choose Provisioning System Set Synchronization Set Sync
Parameter and the following dialog box appears (Figure 4-38).
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-61

Figure 4-38
Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU , EC Priority 1
= GP1-W1-L (STM1 channel1), EC Priority 2 = CLKHZ-X (External
input), EC Priority 3 = GP1-W1-R (Radio Bearer 1)
Set the External Source quality to 2 (G.811) in the Ext 2MHz-X field
Set the EC Threshold field to 5 (Internal Clock quality) then click OK.
Connect the SDH Signal Analyzer to the radio (BSW Port) and set
the byte S1 to 0010 (G.811)
Connect the 2 MHz clock Source to the external clock input
Verify all the setting choosing the Action Retrieve in the same
window.
SRT 1F
4-62 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.7.6.2 Test
Perform all the tests reported in the list below and mark the
appropriate box in the Test Report.
Note: In order to verify the correct execution of the test reported below,
always check the result using the Retrieve action in the dialog box
reported in Figure 4-39.
1. Verify that NE is locked to EC1
2. Disconnect EC1, verify that NE is locked to EC2
3. Re-connect EC1, verify that NE is locked to EC1
4. Disconnect EC1 and EC2, verify that NE is locked to EC3
5. Re-connect EC2, verify that NE is locked to EC2
6. Disconnect EC2 and EC3, verify that NE enter HOLDOVER mode
7. Re-connect ECx, verify that NE is locked to ECx (where x=1,2,3)
8. Switch to FREERUNNING mode
Note: In order to switch to FREERUNNING mode choose Status/Control
Protection
Switch Operate Sync Switch, in the dialog box shown (Figure 4-40)
select Action Operate, Timing Control Type EC and Switch to INT then
click OK.

Figure 4-39
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-63
4.7.7 MSP Switching Test
This test is to confirm the MSP switching operation.
This test is applicable for terminal equipment of OPT INTF with line
protection.
Provisioning: Service State In service (for all units)
1. On the set up shown in Figure 4-40, set the optical variable
Attenuator to the normal condition.
2. On the SRT 1F A equipment, select the X-side of the OPT INTF.
3. Interrupt the optical input signal by increasing the value of the
Variable attenuator, and confirm that the change over from X-side
to Y-side is automatically operated by the MSP function.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for Y-side to X-side change over.
5. On the SRT 1F B equipment, select the X-side of the OPT INTF.
6. Remove the X-side OPT INTF unit, and confirm that the STM-1
signal has automatically changed over from the X-side to the Y-side
by the MSP function.
7. Repeat steps 6 to 7 for Y-side to X-side changeover.
SRT 1F
4-64 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Test Set Up

Figure 4-40 - MSP Switching Function Test
SRT 1F B
SRT 1F A
O
P
T

I
N
T
F
(
X
)

O
P
T

I
N
T
F
(
Y
)

O
P
T

I
N
T
F
(
X
)

O
P
T

I
N
T
F
(
Y
)

Variable
Attenuator
PATTERN
GENERATOR
System X
System X System Y System Y
PATTERN
GENERATOR
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-65
4.8 Appendix
4.8.1 MSTU Setting
MSTUs (Main Signal Transmit Units) are set and tuned at the factory
and commissioning test are executed to assure the system
performance.
There is no need to change settings or to re-adjust the MSTU controls.
Siemens strongly recommends not to attempt to change or re-adjust
settings unless the error performance has degraded seriously due to
equipment deterioration.
The following information is provided for a very skilled technical staff
who might have to change or re-adjust settings in some special
circumstances.
Warning ;
Do not attempt to change or re-adjust settings of MSTU
unless strictly necessary.
If necessary, use the LCT as the first priority.
In case of single antenna reception (without SD),
remove all straps of DADE (8) J1 to J32.
SRT 1F
4-66 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.8.1.1 MSTU Front Panel

Figure 4-41 - Front Panel of MSTU unit
70M IN (5)
REF I/O (6)
MN
70M OUT (7)
SD
D-EQL (9)
DADE (8)

ON

OFF
XPIC OUT (10)
XPIC IN (11)
Factory use only.
ITEM No. must be 0
for normal operation. (12)
INCR
DECR

ITEM No.
UNIT/RCI (13)
LINE
TX F MON
(4)
POWER
ON/OFF
(3)
FAN PWR
(2)
FAN
(1)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-67
Figure 4-41 shows the front panel of the MSTU unit.
Table 4.6 shows the functions of the MSTU front panel
Table 4.6 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel
No. Item Function
(1) FAN Cooling 4 fans for transmitter.
(2) FAN PWR Power cable connector for cooling fans
(3) POWER ON/OFF DC power supply switch for MSTU unit
(4) TX LO MON Monitor terminal for TX local frequency
(5) 70M IN 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement
(6) REF I/O In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation
OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT.
(7) 70M OUT MN
70M OUT SD
70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of
Main/SD antenna reception
(8) DADE DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference
See Figure 4-42 and Table 4.8 for setting.
Remove all straps in case of single antenna reception (without SD).
(9) D-EQL Delay equalizer for branching network
(10) XPIC OUT
(master)
XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation
Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal
(11) XPIC IN
(slave)
XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation
(12) INCR
DECR
ITEM No.
Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only)
Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a LCT terminal for maintenance

See the next page for details.

To memorize the setting,
select ITEM No. = 9, then
press INCR/DECR switches together.

(13) LED indicator
UNIT/RCI
LINE
Alarm/status indicator :
Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking
Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on
* : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the LCT.

SRT 1F
4-68 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Table 4.7 shows the relationship between the position of rotary switch
and functions of Analog Level Setting (12).
Table 4.7 - Function of Rotary Switch (12)
No. Item Function
0 Normal operation The position for normal operation, in service state.
INCR and DECR push switches are invalid.
1 DADE for XPIC Compensates DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer)
between Vertical and Horizontal polarization in case of co-
channel operation.
2 DELAY-H Adjusts IF-IF group delay, high frequency component.
3 DELAY-M Adjusts IF-IF group delay, medium frequency component
4 DELAY-L Adjusts IF-IF group delay, low frequency component
5 ALC LVL Sets TX output level at ALC AUTO (ON)
6 ALC GAIN Sets TX output level at ALC MNL (OFF)
7 SD GAIN Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
to compensate the loss of DADE line.
8 SD SLOPE Adjusts XPIC OUT slope at AGC OFF
to compensate the slope of DADE line.
9 RRF GAIN Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
A RIF GAIN Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
B R SLOPE Compensates the slope of Main line.
C T SLOPE Compensates the slope of TX.
D
E
Normal operation The position for normal operation, in service state.
F FAN replacement For FAN replacement,
inhibits FAN alarm and switches TX output to LOW level.
Use the LCT for setting.
Note
Do not attempt to re-adjust.

To memorize the setting,
select ITEM No. = 9, then
press INCR/DECR switches together.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-69
4.8.1.2 DADE setting for SD
The difference of waveguide length between Main and SD antenna shall
be compensated by DADE (8).
no use

J1 J2 -
J3 J4 -
2 ns
J5 J6 -
J7 J8 -
4 ns
J9 J10 -
J11 J12 -
4 ns
J13 J14 -
J15 J16 -
10 ns
J17 J18 -
J19 J20 -
10 ns
J21 J22 -
J23 J24 -
20 ns
J25 J26 -
J27 J28 -
30 ns
J29 J30 -
J31 J32 -
40 ns

Figure 4-42 - Strap pin for SD DADE Adjustment

See Table 4.8 for example of SD DADE setting.

SRT 1F
4-70 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Table 4.8 - DADE setting for SD

Strap position vs Delay difference between Main and SD antenna

0 ns 2 ns 4 ns 10 ns 18 ns 36 ns 110 ns

J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
2 ns
J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4
J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6
4 ns
J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8
J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10
4 ns
J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12
J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14
10 ns
J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16
J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18
10 ns
J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20
J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22
20 ns
J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24
J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26
30 ns
J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28
J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30
40 ns
J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32

0 ns :
Keep all straps as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J7 and so on.
2 ns :
Strap J1 to J2, J3 to J4, but keep others as default, J5 to J7, J6 to J7 and so on.
4 ns :
Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J9 to J11, J10
to J12 and so on.
10 ns :
Strap J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7,
J6 to J7, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on.
14 ns :
Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3,
J2 to J4 and so on.

Attention : In case of single antenna reception (without SD),
remove all straps J1 to J32.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-71
4.8.2 Hardware Setting
Most of system settings on the SRT 1F equipment are set through the
LCT terminal.
However, some part of system setting shall be carried out with hardware
switches. These settings are completed at the factory test according to
the system data and standard value. If needing to change these
parameters, follow this instruction.
Table 4.9 - Hardware Setting Position
Unit Item Switch Setting Default
X.25 default SV unit OSSI type SWA1
NE Back to Back
Balance default EXT 2M CLK (Y) input SW81
Unbalance
Balance default EXT 2M CLK (X) input SW82
Unbalance
Bipolar HDB3 (Bit/sec) EXT 2M CLK (Y) input
pattern
SW71, 72
Return to Zero (Hz) default
Bipolar HDB3 (Bit/sec) EXT 2M CLK (X) input
pattern
SW73, 74
Bipolar HDB3 (Bit/sec) T0, T4 CLK output
pattern
SW75
Bipolar HDB3 (Bit/sec)
TCU
T0, T4 CLK output
(Supply voltage for
output buffer)
CN64 (T4)
CN65 (T0) Return to Zero (Hz) default
Balance default CMI input SW2B
Unbalance
Balance default WS input for 75 ohms SW25 (RFCOH)
SW28 (SOH) Unbalance
75 ohms unbalance default WS output SW75 (RFCOH)
SW77 (SOH) 120 ohms balance
75 ohms default
BSW
WS input SW24 (RFCOH)
SW27 (SOH) 120 ohms balance
Balance default OCC
INTF
CMI input SW29
Unbalance
Balance default PE INTF CMI input SW71
Unbalance

Figure 4-43 to Figure 4-47 show the position of switches.
SRT 1F
4-72 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.8.2.1 SV unit

Item Switch Setting Position
X.25 OPEN OSSI type SWA1
NE Back to Back CLOSE

Figure 4-43 - SWA1 on SV unit front panel

S
V

X25/BTB
S
W
A
1
OPEN = X. 25 (default)
CLOSE = NE Back to Back
OPEN CLOSE
X25/BTB
Factory use
(Default = Open)
Soft Run
Not in Use
Buzz OFF (RAB)
X.25/BTB
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-73
4.8.2.2 TCU unit
Balance BAL EXT 2M CLK (Y) input SW81
Unbalance UNBAL
Balance BAL EXT 2M CLK (X) input SW82
Unbalance UNBAL
Bipolar HDB3 (Bit/sec) BIP EXT 2M CLK (Y) input
pattern
SW71, 72
Return to Zero (Hz) RZ
Bipolar HDB3 (Bit/sec) BIP EXT 2M CLK (X) input
pattern
SW73, 74
Bipolar HDB3 (Bit/sec) BIP T0, T4 CLK output
pattern
SW75
Bipolar HDB3 (Bit/sec) BIP T0, T4 CLK output
pattern
CN64 (T4)
CN65 (T0) Return to Zero (Hz) RZ
T0 = jitter FREE T4 = non jitter FREE

Figure 4-44 - TCU Setting

RZ
(default) RZ
(default)
BIP
UNBAL
BAL
(default)
BIP
CN64, 65 SW81, 82 SW71 to 75
L TOP
TCU unit
SW81
SW82
SW71
SW72
SW73
SW74
SW75
CN64
CN65
C
N
9
2

C
N
9
6

Through
TCU/01
SW23
(Factory use)
Default
Norm
2M INTF
SRT 1F
4-74 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.8.2.3 BSW unit
Balance BAL CMI input SW2B
Unbalance UNBAL
Balance BAL WS input
for 75 ohms
SW25 (RFCOH)
SW28 (SOH) Unbalance UNBAL
75 ohms unbalance 75 WS output SW75 (RFCOH)
SW77 (SOH) 120 ohms balance 120
75 ohms 75 WS input SW24 (RFCOH)
SW27 (SOH) 120 ohms balance 120

Figure 4-45 - BSW Setting

120
75
(default)
SW24, 27
UNBAL
BAL
(default)
SW2B, 25, 28
120 75
(default)
SW75, 77
L TOP
BSW unit
C
N
9
6

C
N
9
2

SW2B
SW77
SW28
SW27
SW75
SW25
SW24
SW69 Factory Use
(Default = Close)
C
L
O
S
E

O
P
E
N

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-75
4.8.2.4 OCC INTF unit

Balance BAL CMI input SW29
Unbalance UNBAL

Figure 4-46 OCC INTF setting
L TOP
OCC INTF unit
C
N
9
6

C
N
9
2

SW29
UNBAL
BAL
(default)
SW29
SRT 1F
4-76 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.8.2.5 PE INTF unit
Balance BAL CMI input SW71
Unbalance UNBAL

Figure 4-47 - PE INTF Setting
L TOP
PE INTF unit
C
N
3
H

C
N
8
H
C
N
A
H
SW71
UNBAL BAL
(default)
SW71
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-77
4.8.3 Provisioning through LCT
Most part of system setting is carried out through the LCT (Local
Terminal).
No. LCT Command Unit Functions
4 Provisioning

4.1 Service State Changes Primary service state IS (In Service) and OOS
(Out of Service)
Enter = Changes from OOS to IS
Delete = Changes from IS to OOS
Retrieve = Displays current service state
4.1.1 Change EQPT State BBIU Service state of BB INTF unit
4.1.2 Change Facility State BBIU Service state of STM1RS facility
4.1.3 Change RPS State All Service state of Radio Protection System
a Group 1 All Service state of RPS Group 1
b Group 2 All Service state of RPS Group 2

4.2 Facility
4.2.1 Set Baseband Interface All
a Set OHB BBIU
(MSTU)
Usage of RSOH and MSOH
STM1RS = J0, E1, D1 to D3, B1
STM1MS = MS AIS, MS FERF, E2, D4 to D12
SSBIT, B2, K1K2, Z1,Z2
b Set Facility Threshold BBIU Threshold level of error performance
STM1RS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS
STM1MS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES,
AU4 = PJS
c Set Facility Group BBIU Excessive Error initiator
Signal Fail/Signal Degrade
Signal Degrade Threshold = 1E-5 to 1E-9
d Set Alarm Attribute Alarm severity and SA/NSA of following items
4.2.1d
MSTU
Set Alarm Attribute MSTU EQPT = CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI,
FAN-FAIL, XPIC-OFF, DEM-FLR, MOD-FLR,
ACTCW, RX-FLR, ACTEPSOFF, ACTSDDADE,
ACTAGCOFF, FMSR, RXLCINT, TCA-RLTS, TX-
FLR, ACTALCOFF, TCA-TLTS, PSFAIL
RSPI = DEM-LOS, LOF, UAS-RP, SUE-RP, TUE-RP,
TCA-RP, TCA-OFS, FADE-ALM, RADRM, RP-
ERR, MOD-LOS, RX-LOS, SD-RCV-DN, TX-LOS
WS = LOS
CNCT = XPIC-LOS, 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS, PIN-LOS
SRT 1F
4-78 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.2.1d
BBIU
Set Alarm Attribute BBIU EQPT = OPOR, OPD, LBOL, CARD-FAIL, RMVD,
MIMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, ACTALS, ALSTST,
ALSMAN, PSFAIL
STM1RS = SUE-B1, TUE-B1, TCA-B1, TCA-OFS, LOS,
STIM, UAS-B1
STM1MS = FERF, SUE-B2, TUE-B2, TCA-B2, UAS-
FEBE, SUE-FEBE, TUE-FEBE, TCA-FEBE,
SSMBCHG, LOOPBACK, CSESP, FESP, TESP,
FSEP, TSEP, AIS
AU4 = LOP, AIS, TCA-PJS
UC = LOS
CNCT = 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS
4.2.1d
SCSU
Set Alarm Attribute SCSU SV = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, LOG-THC, TLOG-THC,
SUBUNIT-FAIL, RCI). RUC (LOS). RSC (LOF).
DCC (DCC-FAIL). RPS (PRCM). COM (ACTACO).
CNCT (SINT-FAIL)
ECU1,2 = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-
CM/NC, RCI). DCC (DCC-FAIL)
HK1,2 = EQPT (same as ECU1,2)
TCU = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-
CM/NC, WKSWP, RCI, MANSW, FRCDSW,
FRZSW, PSFAIL). CLKBIT (LOS-2MB, AIS, FAL).
CLKHZ (LOS-2MH). SYNC (SWTOHO, SWTOINT,
HOLDOVER, INTERNAL, MANSW, EXTCLK-
CUTOFF, QUALITY-DOWN, SYNSW PRI1/2/3)
4.2.1e Set Trace BBIU
e1 Set OHB BBIU J0 Byte (N/STMID/TRC) for Trace
e2 Set Trace Value BBIU Expect Trace, Sending Trace, MIS-STI Alarm OFF
f Set Signal Label BBIU
f1 Set OHB BBIU Usage of SOH for signal label
f2 Set SLB Value BBIU Signal label value
4.2.2 Set Radio Interface MSTU
a Set RSPI MSTU Recovery (and Generation) of BERALM, Route ID,
SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)
b Set Radio Channel MSTU Frequency CH, Local Clock Master/Slave, Inhibit
MOD/DEM function
c Set Facility Threshold MSTU SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS
d Set Level Threshold MSTU RL-1, RL-2, TL (dBm)
e Set Auto Transmit
Control
MSTU ATPC Mode (LOW/HIGH/AUTO)
ATPC Initiator Level (dBm)
f Set RSC All X(Prot)/Y(Main), DSC SEL (P/W1 to 7)
4.2.3 Set Way side traffic MSTU SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)
4.2.4 Set User Channel BBIU 64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA)
4.2.5 Set Radio User Channel All RUCVFT(dBr), RUCVFR(dBr), 64K Interface
(CODIRE/CONTRA)
4.3 System
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-79
4.3.1 Set NE ID All NE ID = TID = System ID
4.3.2 Set Date and Time All Current date and time
4.3.3 Set System Configuration All System Type, RF Type, FRQ Arrangement, Space
Diversity, Line Interface, BBIU Use, Group1 Max CH,
Group 2 Max CH, Group 1 RPS (Y/N), Group 2 RPS
(Y/N)
4.3.4 Set Optional Unit
Configuration
All ECU (Y/N), HK unit (Y/N), TCU Protection
4.3.5 Set Interface Configuration All Sets BB INTF configuration
N/OPTL1/OPTL2/OPTL3
4.3.6 Set PM Time All Standard time for Performance Monitor start
4.3.7 Set Housekeeping Alarm SCSU Alarm Severity, Alarm Type, Alarm Message
4.3.8 Set Ext. Control Name SCSU Control Type
4.3.9 Set Alarm Delay All ALM ACT Time (0/2.5/10), ALM DACT Time (0/16)
4.3.10 Set Synchronization All
a Set Synch Mode All Synch Mode =
b Set Synch Parameter All CLK MODE (TCU/THROUGH), EC Priority (1/2), LC
Priority (1/2/3), Ext 2Mhz, Ext 2Mb/s, EC output 2Mbit
EC Threshold, LC Threshold, Error Free (Y/N)
4.3.11 Set Radio Protection Sys
a Set System Parameter All Maximum CH, Priority CH, Wait to Restore, OCC Use
b Set SW Initiator All SW Initiator (Y/N)
4.3.12 Set MSP BBIU Lock in Function, Switching Count, Monitor Time, Hold
Time, Direction, Persist Check Time, Uni/Bi Code Mask,
MSP Mode Setting
4.3.13 Set ALS BBIU ALS Function (Y/N), Release Time
4.3.14 Set Equipment Inventory All Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No. NE-Type, Resource
Status, Eqpt-Note
4.3.15 Set LBK Release Time Loopback RLS Time (hour)
4.3.16 Set Orderwire
a Set OHB BBIU E1 (Y/N), E2 (Y/N)
b Channel Select All E1/2 (N/GP-W1/ GP-W2/....)
c OW Function All OW Function (Y/N), Group Address, Station Address,
LED, Buzzer, Relay, Ringer
d OW Extension All OW Extension E1/2, OW VF TX/RX (-dBr)
4.3.17 Set LED Mode All Mode 1 (Normal = yellow) / Mode 2 (Normal = green)

4.4 Section DCC
4.4.1 SDCC Service State All In service/Out of Service
4.4.2 LAPD Parameter All Window Size, Frame Timeout, Inact Timeout, Retries,
Frame Size, LAPD Cmd/Rsp, LAPD Data Link
4.4.3 Set 2
nd
DCC All 2
nd
DCC CH selection
SRT 1F
4-80 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.5 OSS Interface
4.5.1 OSSI type & Service State All X25/OSI/Back to Back, IS/OOS
4.5.2 LAPB Parameter All Type, Window Size, Retry Timer, Packet Size,
Retransmit
4.5.3 X25 Parameter All X25 Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation,
Restart Timer, Request Timeout, Reset Timeout, Clear
Timeout, Closed User ID, Channel-Lower, Channel-
Upper
4.5.4 VC Parameter All PVC = Group No. CH NO. Peer Address
SVC = Peer Address, Packet Size, Window Size,
Confirmation, Ntwk User ID

4.6 Network Layer Protocol
4.6.1 NLP Parameter All NLP Type (IS1/IS1 IS2/ES), Area Address, System ID
4.6.2 NLP Manual Adjacency All NLP Type (SVC/PVC), Area Address, System ID
4.6.3 NLP Address Prefix All NLP Type (SVC), Area Prefix
4.6.4 NLP Manual Area Address All Manual Area Address
4.6.5 Display NLP Manual Area
Address
All Scope (LCL/NTWK)
4.6.6 NLP Intermediate Sys1 All Max Area
4.6.7 NLP Intermediate Sys2 All Reachable Area Address

4.7 TARP Control TID Address Resolution Protocol Control
4.7.1 TARP Parameters All TARP Type, Response Time
4.7.2 TARP Manual Adjacency All Adjacency NTWK Address, Destination NTWK Address,
NPL Type
4.7.3 Display TARP Manual
Adjacency
All Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address
4.7.4 Display TARP Cache All Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address, TID List
4.7.5 Operate TARP Echo All Destination TID, System ID, NTWK Address, Request
Working Address, Retries, Response Timer, TID List

4.8 LAN Parameters All TARP Packet, Packet Size, LAN SAP, Service State

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 4-81

6 Administration
6.1 Add User All Adds and defines a new LCT user for the NE
6.2 Delete User All Deletes a LCT user from the NE
6.3 Change User All Changes privilege of a user
6.4 Change Logged User
Password
All Changes the password of user now logged on to the NE
6.5 Show User List All Shows the user list registered for the NE
6.6 Show Logged User Privilege All Shows privilege of the user now logged on to the NE

SRT 1F
4-82 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

UMN 5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-1
5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
General
Maintenance Philosophy
During normal operation, the Siemens SRT 1F microwave radio system
requires no intrusive maintenance work by maintenance personnel. The
main duties of maintenance & operation are:
Keep tidy and clean the equipment and the environment.
Observe alarm/status information and record properly.
In case of system failure, locate the fault and rectify it.
If any unit has failed, replace with a spare unit and recover the
system.
Human Machine Interface
For maintenance & operation interface, the SRT 1F provides:
LED indications on each unit.
Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) to extend alarm/status information outside
the SRT 1F equipment.
5.1 LED Indications
The SV (Supervisory) unit of SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching
Unit) indicates the summary of alarms/status conditions. The LEDs on
SV unit are visible through the SCSU front cover.
Each unit has LEDs for local indication of the alarm/status summary.
The LEDs on each unit will be observed by removing the front cover.
Details of alarm/status shall be observed through the LCT (Local
terminal) or Centralized SV.
Alarm indications, to be displayed or not displayed, are set by Alarm
Severity of Set Alarm Attribute, Facility, Provisioning through the LCT.
Figure 5-1 and Table 5.1 show LED indications of the SV unit.
Figure 5-2 and Table 5.2 shows LED indications of other unit.
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE UMN
SRT 1F
5-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 5-1 - Front View of SV unit

D-sub 9 (f)
LED Indicator
Modular Jack
Push SW
Dip switch
ACS/SWDL
MISC
LINE
UNIT/RCI
BACK UP
NORM
CR/MJ/RCI
MN/WR
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
ACO SW
LED TEST
LCT
LAN
X25/BTB
2W
E1
2W
E2

S
V

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-3
Table 5.1 - LED Indication of SV unit
LED Indication
Group LED Color Status Description
Steady on Unit failure of SV unit
Log memory threshold crossed
Red
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of SV unit
UNIT/RCI
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of SV unit
Red Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure LINE
Green (Y) Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal
MISC Red Steady on Housekeeping alarm (DI) on
Green (Y) Steady on NE is logged on by user
Red Steady on Mismatch of software version
ACS/SWDL
Yellow (G) Blinking Software download is on progress
Indication
for
SV unit
BACK UP Yellow (G) Steady on Back up of setting data is on progress
NORM Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of NE
Steady on CR/MJ alarm of any unit in NE CR/MJ/RCI Red
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in
NE
MN/WR Red Steady on MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
MAINT Yellow (G) Steady on Maintenance condition of NE
Red Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than
WR
CARD OUT
Yellow (G) Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious
than WR
Indication
for
NE
ACO Yellow (G) Steady on Alarm cut off of NE
CALL E1 Green (Y) Blinking E1 orderwire is being called Orderwire
CALL E2 Green (Y) Blinking E2 orderwire is being called
Note : Green (Y)
Yellow (G)
SRT 1F
5-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Figure 5-2 - LED Indication of Other Unit

Table 5.2 - LED Indication of Other Unit
Unit LED Color Status Description
Steady on Unit failure of the unit Red
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) is operated
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of the unit
All units UNIT/RCI
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of the unit
Red Steady on Loss of Main, Synch or other signal All units
except HK
LINE
Green (Y) Steady on Line signal (working side) is normal
SV unit SWDL Yellow (G) Steady on SWDL (Software Download) is on progress
Note : Green (Y)
Yellow (G)

UNIT/RCI
LINE
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-5
5.2 LCT
The LCT (Local terminal) is the main human machine interface for
operation & maintenance and system set-up (turn-up).
Table 5.3 shows the outline of LCT function.
Table 5.3 - Outline of LCT Function
1 File Establishes/exits communication to NE
2 Session Logs on/logs off to NE
3 TL1 Creates and sends out TL1 commands
4 Provisioning Sets the system configuration
Sets the usage of SOH
Sets alarm severity and threshold level
Sets parameters of NE
5 Status/Control Displays alarms/status
Displays error performance monitor
Displays analog data of radio section
Controls radio protection switch
Controls other maintenance switches
Sets analog level of radio section
6 Administration Administrates LCT users
7 Window Manages window display of LCT
8 Help Shows help and version information of LCT
application

More details are available in this equipment manual.
The LCT application software on 3.5 inch diskettes is supplied by
Siemens. The customer is requested to install the software onto a
Personal Computer.
Table 5.4 shows the minimum requirement of hardware to install and
operate the LCT software.
Table 5.4 - Hardware Requirement
CPU Pentium 90 or faster
DRAM 16 MB or more
HD space 200 MB (Minimum available space)
Diskette drive 3.5 inch for software setup
Recommended Monitor 800 600 16 bit color mode
OS MS Windows 98 or Windows NT 4.0 (English
version)
I-O Ports Minimum of one operatine Serial port
SRT 1F
5-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.2.1 Start-up LCT Operation
Connect the LCT terminal to the SV unit of SCSU block with an RS-
232C straight cable (9-pin D-sub male to female).
Warning
If you use a desk top PC, connect ground terminals
together to prevent likely damage to components due to
electrical surges.

Turn on the power of LCT terminal, then start the LCT application.
Log on to NE (SRT 1F equipment)
When the LCT screen appeares, click [ Logon ] button of the Tool Bar
(2) and wait until Tid.log window comes up.
Enter System ID (TID), User name, Password and click [ OK ].
Figure 5-3 shows an example of LCT display after logging on.
If you cannot log on to NEs (Network Element; SRT 1F equipment),
check the communication setting between the LCT and the local NE by
opening Session Comm setup from the Main Menu Bar (1).
When the LCT has logged on to the NE, the Shelf window (4) and
Global View (3) will be displayed on the screen.
Multiple Log on
Maximum 3 NEs in the DCC (Digital Communication Channel) can be
logged on simultaneously by a LCT terminal. However you cannot log on
to any NE outside of the DCC area of the connected LCT.
Alarm Report
Alarm summary of NE is indicated through a change of the colours of
the icons on the Global View window.
Icon of Unit picture Icon on Global View Alarm Severity
Red Critical
Orange Major
Yellow Minor
Red
Brown Warning
Green (LED mode 2)
Yellow (LED mode 1)
Green (LED mode 2)
Yellow (LED mode 1)
Normal

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-7
Alarm/Control
To supervise/control the logged NE, click Status/Control of Main
Menu Bar (1) and select the sub-menu following the LCT command
tree. Details of the LCT command tree are available in this manual.
Figure 5-3 - Example of LCT Display
Quick View/Control (click right button)
For quick view/control of NE, click the right mouse button on the
applicable space. Menus required for routine operation & maintenance
will be displayed.
New/Last alarm reports are displayed by clicking the right mouse button.
Last Alarm Report: the alarm message already retrieved.
New Alarm Report: the alarm message newly generated after the
previous retrieve command.

A
Note :
(1) : Main Menu Bar
(2) : Tool Bar
(3) : Global View
(4) : Shelf Window
(5) : Unit Picture
(6) : Check mark (C mark) to show applicable unit
(7) : Alarm Icon of Unit picture
(8) : Output

File Session TL1 Provisioning Status/Control Administration Window Help
Exit About Options TL1 Close Open Logoff Logon
Global View

COMMON SCSU
SCSU
Group 1
GROUP1 - MSTU
GROUP1 - BBIU
Group 2
GROUP2 - MSTU
GROUP2 - BBIU

M
S
T
U

W
3

M
S
T
U

W
2

M
S
T
U

W
1

M
S
T
U

P
C C C C
Group 1 : GROUP1 - MSTU
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(6)
SENT>> RTRV-LED-ALL::
RESP>>11-12-2001
(8)
(7) UNIT
LINE
SRT 1F
5-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Global View window : All alarms of the NE
Open space of Shelf window : All alarms of the shelf selected
Unit of Shelf window : Alarms of the unit selected
Table 5.5 shows the quick view/control menu of each unit.
Table 5.5 - Quick View/Control (Right Click)
Shelf BBIU SCSU

Unit
M
S
T
U

B
B

I
N
T
F

B
B
C

S
V

E
C
U

H
K

T
C
U

New Alarm Report : Card V V V V V V V
Last Alarm Report : Card V V V V V V V
New Alarm Report : Shelf V V V V V V V
Last Alarm Report : Shelf V V V V V V V
Close Shelf V V V V V V V
Set OHB (V)* V
Set RSPI V
Set Radio Channel V
Set Facility Threshold V
Set Level Threshold V
Set Automatic Transmit Control V
ALS Release (OPT INTF only) V
Display Log Files V V V V V V V
Display Current Level V
Display History Level V
Display Threshold Crossing Seconds V
Display CSES Log V
Change Maintenance State V
Radio Physical Interface V
RSPI Adjustment V
Display Equipment Inventory V
Display Unit Inventory V V V V V V V

Note: * Set OHB of MSTU is not applicable if BBIU is installed.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-9
Auto Report
If wanting the NE to display the latest conditions automatically reflecting
any change of alarm/status, execute
Status/Control
Auto Report Control
Allow Alarm Report
Allow LED Report
Allow Report
Allow Report is canceled when the user logs off from the NE. Other
commands remain valid until the user execute Inhibit Alarm (LED)
Report.
SRT 1F
5-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Unit Status
Unit status, such as In Service, Out of Service, Active, Standby,
Unequipped or Removed, is indicated by the colors of unit icons on the
Shelf window as follows:
Color Primary State Secondary State
Gray
Unit LED = Green*
In Service (IS) Active (ACT)
Gray
Unit LED = White
In Service (IS) Stand-by (STB)
Green Out of service (OOS)
Memory administration (MA)

Yellow Removed
Purple Not configured
No color Out of supervisory through LCT

Unit LED* :
Active Unit is green coloured for Mode 2, and yellow for Mode 1.

Selecting Unit
Some of Provisioning or Status/Control menus are unit related.
Appropriate unit(s) have to be selected before executing the menu
command.
1. Select the required menu by clicking on the Main Menu Bar (1) first.
2. To select a unit to be supervised/controlled, click on an applicable
unit which is marked with a [ C ]. The selected unit icon will be
recessed.
3. Then click any open space within the shelf window to activate the
menu command.
It might be possible to select multiple units. However, if selecting mis-
matched units, the LCT will reject your unit selection by displaying a
warning message.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-11
5.2.2 Alarm (Condition) Type and Description
This section sorts out alarm details to be indicated by the LCT.
Alarm severity can be changed through the LCT if required by the
operation conditions.
Alarm indications through unit LED are also affected by alarm severity.
NA (No Alarm) and NR (No Report) will not be indicated by unit LEDs.
NR (No Report) does not send out the message from the NE. NR can
reduce the traffic of alarm message on the DCC line.
The full list of alarm/condition items and severity change menu are
available:
Provisioning
Facility
Set Baseband Interface
Set Alarm Attribute
Abb. Severity Notes
CR Critical Affects on the traffic transmission directly.
MJ Major
MN Minor
NA No Alarm Not displayed by LED, LCT
NR No Report Messages are not sent out from the NE.

Unit AID Type Alarm Type Description Status
MSTU EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm
RMVD Unit is Removed Alarm
MISMOUNT-CM Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch) Alarm
MISMOUNT-NC Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Alarm
RCI Remote Card Identifier is given Condition
FAN-FAIL Fan Failure Alarm
XPIC-OFF XPIC is Off
(for co-channel operation system)
Condition
DEM-FLR DEM block Failure
QAM DEM LSI failed (Clock loss of QAM DEM LSI)
Alarm
MOD-FLR MOD block Failure
MOD DEM LSI failed (Clock loss of MOD DEM LSI)
Alarm
ACTCW Carrier Wave in Active Condition
Modulation is suspended for maintenance
Condition
RX-FLR RX block Failure
IF output failure occurred
Alarm
SRT 1F
5-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
MSTU EQPT ACTEPSOFF EPS-OFF in Active Condition
(for SD reception)
Condition
ACTSDDADE SD-DADE in Active Condition
MSTU is in SD-DADE adjustment mode
Condition
ACTAGCOFF AGC-OFF in Active Condition
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of RX is Off (manual)
= maintenance
Condition
FMSR Frequency Measurement
ALC, AGC and EPS are OFF for IF-IF measurement
Condition
RXLCINT RX Local is Internal
(for co-channel operation system)
Condition
TCA-RLTS Alert of RX Receive Level Threshold Crossing
Seconds
Condition
TX-FLR TX block Failure
TX output level is out of 3 dB
Alarm
ACTALCOFF ALC-OFF in Active Condition
ALC (Automatic Level Control) of TX is Off (Manual)
= maintenance
Condition
TCA-TLTS Alert of TX Transmit Level Threshold Crossing
Seconds
Condition
PSFAIL Power Supply Failure Alarm

MSTU RSPI DEM-LOS Loss of Signal in DEM block
Input signal loss to QAM DEM LSI
Alarm
LOF Loss of Frame occurred
Frame alignment loss of Radio frame.
Alarm
UAS-RP Unavailable Seconds by RP (Radio Parity) Condition
SUE-RP Start of Unavailability Event by RP Condition
TUE-RP Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by RP Condition
TCA-RP Threshold Crossing Alert of RP Condition
TCA-OFS Threshold Crossing Alert of Out of Frame Second Condition
FADE-ALM Fading alarm
Degradation of received IF spectrum and BER ALM
of radio parity occurred
Alarm
RADRM Radio Route ID Mismatch Alarm
RP-ERR Excessive Bit Error Rate (RP) Alarm
MOD-LOS Loss of Signal in MOD block
Input signal loss to QAM MOD LSI
Alarm
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-13
MSTU RSPI RX-LOS Loss of Signal in RX
MN-RCV-DN or SD-RCV-DN occurred
Alarm
MN-RCV-DN MN RX Received level Down to squelch level
(equivalent to BER = 10-3)
Alarm
SD-RCV-DN SD RX Received level Down to squelch level
(equivalent to BER = 10
-3
)
Alarm
TX-LOS Loss of Signal in TX
10 dB down IF input level occurred
Alarm

MSTU WS LOS Loss of Signal WS input occurred Alarm

MSTU CNCT XPIC-LOS Loss of Signal in XPIC Alarm
6MCLK-LOS Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz)
Loss of STM-1 reference clock signal (6.48 MHz)
from TCU to MSTU
Alarm
STM-LOS Loss of Signal STM Alarm
PIN-LOS Loss of Protection Signal
Loss of signal from Prot CH was detected at USW
Alarm
AU4 LOP Loss of pointer occurred Alarm
AIS Alarm indication signal is received Alarm
BBIU EQPT OPOR Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range
(OPT INTF only)
Alarm
OPD Degradation in Optical Power transmitted
(OPT INTF only)
Alarm
LBOL Laser bias current is too high
Laser bias of OPT INTF exceeded the threshold.
Alarm
CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm
MISMOUNT-CN Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Alarm
ACTALS Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function active
ALS of OPT INTF unit is enabled
Condition
ALSTST Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function released
by Test restart
Laser emission of OPT INTF is restarted by
Test = 90 seconds
Condition
SRT 1F
5-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
BBIU EQPT ALSMAN Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function released
by Manual restart
Laser emission of OPT INTF is restarted by
Manual = 2 seconds
Condition
PSFAIL Power Supply Failure Alarm

STM1RS SUE-B1 Start of Unavailability Event by B1 Condition BBIU
MSTU*
TUE-B1 Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by B1 Condition
TCA-B1 Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to
cumulative number of Background Block Errors by
B1
BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period
BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period
ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period
ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period
SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M
period
SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period
Condition
TCA-LOS Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to
cumulative number of Loss of Signal seconds
Condition
TCA-OFS Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to
cumulative number of Out of Flame seconds
Condition
LOS Loss of Signal occurred
Loss of STM1 signal input occurred.
Alarm
LOF Loss of frame. Alarm
STIM Section Trace ID Mismatch occurred Alarm
UAS-B1 Unavailable Seconds (B1) Alarm

STM1MS B2-ERR Excessive Bit Error Rate (B2) Alarm
B2-SD Signal Degrade (B2) Alarm
FERF Far End Receive Failure occurred

Alarm
SUE-B2 Start of Unavailability Event by B2 Condition
TUE-B2 Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by B2 Condition
TCA-B2 Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to
cumulative number of Background Block Errors of
B2
period
Condition
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-15
UAS-B2 Unavailable State (B2) Alarm
UAS-FEBE Unavailable Seconds of FEBE (Far End Block Error)

Alarm
SUE-FEBE Start of Unavailability Event by FEBE Condition
TUE-FEBE Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by FEBE Condition
BBIU
MSTU
STM1MS TCA-FEBE Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to
cumulative number of Background Block Errors by
FEBE
period
Condition
SSMBCHG Synchronization Status Message Byte changed Condition
LOOPBACK Loopback in Active condition Condition
CSESP Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection
occurred
Error rate of Protection CH exceeded Severely
Errored threshold consecutively
Alarm
FESP Errored Seconds in 15-minute time period
TESP Errored Seconds in 24-hours time period
FSEP Severely Errored Seconds in 15-minute time period
TSEP Severely Errored Seconds in 24-hours time period
AIS Alarm Indication Signal is received Alarm

BBIU AU4 LOP Loss of Pointer occurred Alarm
TCA-PJS Threshold Crossing Alert of Pointer Justification
Seconds
period
Condition

BBIU UC LOS Loss of input Signal Alarm

SRT 1F
5-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
BBIU CNCT 6MCLK-LOS Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz)
Loss of STM-1 reference clock signal (6.48 MHz)
from TCU to MSTU
Alarm
STM-LOS Loss of Signal STM input Alarm

SCSU
SV EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm
LOG-THC Log memory Threshold Crossed Alarm
TLOG-THC Transaction Log memory Threshold Crossed Alarm
SUBUNIT-FAIL Backup sub-unit Failure Alarm
RUC LOS Loss of input Signal of RUC occurred Alarm
RSC LOF Loss of frame of RSC occurred Alarm
RPS PRCM Priority Channel Mismatch Alarm
SWNG-BSW Switching Failure in BSW Alarm
SWNG-USW Switching Failure in USW Alarm

LOCKOUT-
BSW
Lockout of BSW
Condition

LOCKOUT-
USW
Lockout of USW
Condition

REQ-BSW Bipolar Switch Request
Condition

REQ-USW Unipolar Switch Request
Condition

FRCD-BSW Forced Switch of BSW
Condition

FRCD-USW Forced Switch of USW
Condition

MAN-BSW Manual Switch of BSW
Condition

MAN-USW Manual Switch of USW
Condition

TRAFICTOP-
BSW
Traffic to Protection by BSW
Condition

TRAFICTOP-
USW
Traffic to Protection by USW
Condition
COM ACTACO Alarm Cut Off in Active Condition
Audible alarm extension is cut off
Condition
CNCT SINT-FAIL Serial Interface Failure Alarm

ECU EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-17
DCC DCC-FAIL DCC Failure Alarm

HK EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm

TCU EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm
WKSWP Working unit is Switched to Protection
by manually or automatically
Condition
MANSW TCU is Manually switched to stand-by Condition
FRCDSW TCU is Forcibly switched to stand-by Condition
FRZSW TCU unit protection is in freeze condition Condition
PSFAIL Power Supply failure Alarm
TCU CLTBIT LOS-2MB Loss of 2Mb/s clock signal input Alarm
FAL Frame Alignment Loss occurred
Synchronization loss of Frame Alignment signal
occurred
Alarm
TCU CLKHZ LOS-2MH Loss of 2MHz clock signal input Alarm
TCU SYNC SWTOHO Synchronization reference is Switched to Holdover
Condition
SWTOINT Synchronization reference is Switched to Internal
Condition
HOLDOVER Synchronizing clock signal is in Holdover state
TCU has lost the input reference clock signal and
running in the Holdover mode.
Condition
INTERNAL Synchronizing clock signal is in Internal state
TCU is running in the Internal oscillation mode
Condition
MANSW Switch is in Manual switch mode Condition
EXTCLK-CUTOFF External Clock signal is Cut Off Alarm
SRT 1F
5-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
TCU SYNC QUALITY-DOWN Quality of the synchronization clock signal has
deteriorated
Alarm
SYNSWPRI1 Synchronization Switched to Priority 1 reference
Condition
Condition
Condition

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-19

5.2.3 Performance Monitor
Transmission performances across the SRT 1F section are monitored
by detecting parity error of B1 (STM1RS), B2 (STM1MS) and Radio
parity (RSPI) (factory user only).
Error performances are displayed:
Status/Control
Performance Monitor
Display PM Data
Radio Protection Switching count and duration (PSC, PSD) also show
the stability of SRT 1F transmission system.
PSC and PSD are displayed:
Status/Control
Radio Protection Switch
Group 1 or Group 2
CH No. and BSW/USW selection
Display PM Data
The following table shows Performance monitor types and their
description/threshold level.

Unit(AID) Monitor Types Description and Threshold Levels
BBE Background Block Error
The number of errored block which is detected during the normal
operation period except the duration of SES and UAS.
15-MIN : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215)
1-DAY : 0 to 4294967295 units (default = 4294967295)
BBIU or
MSTU
(STM1MS)
(STM1RS)
(RSPI =
before Error
Correction)
BBE for VC4 Background Block Error for VC4
BBER Background Block Error Ratio
15-MIN : 0E-0 to 1.4E-7
1-DAY : 0E-0 to 1.4E-9
ES Errored Seconds
The number of second which contains at least one block error during
the Available time.
15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900)
1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)

SRT 1F
5-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
ESR Errored Second Ratio
15-MIN : 0E-0 to 1.1E-3
1-DAY : 0E-0 to 1.2E-5
SES Severely Errored Seconds
The number of second which contains Errored Blocks (EB) more than
Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) during the Available time.
SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio

continued;--
BBIU or
MSTU
(STM1MS)
(STM1RS)
(RSPI =
before Error
Correction)
SEV Severely Errored Threshold
The percentage of Errored Block which defines Severely Errored
Second (SES) and Unavailability Second (UAS).
10 to 50 % (default = 30)
SEVR Severely Errored Threshold Ratio
10 to 50 % (default = 30)
UAF Unavailability Filter
The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV)
which defines Unavailability Seconds (UAS).
2 to 10 seconds (default = 10)
UAFR Unavailability Filter Ratio
2 to 10 seconds (default = 10)
UAS Unavailability Seconds
The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV)
which is defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF).
In case of UAF = 10 sec, a period of UAS starts when Errored Block
(EB) in each second exceeds SEV for 10 consecutive seconds, and
terminates when EB does not exceed SEV for 10 consecutive
seconds.
OFS Out of Frame Seconds
The number of seconds which contains at least one occasion of
synchronization loss of the frame alignment signal.
NSES Number of Severely Errored Seconds
Threshold of CSES (Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-21

PJCH
PJCL
Pointer Justification Count High
Pointer Justification Count Low
The number of frame which contains at least one occasion of pointer
justification decrement (PJCH) or increment (PJCL).
BBIU
(PE INTF)
PJS Pointer Justification Seconds
The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PJCH
and/or PJCL.
MSTU
(RPS)
PSAC-B
PSAC-U
Protection Switch Actual Count BSW
Protection Switch Actual Count USW
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation (BSW
and USW respectively).
15-MIN : 0 to 1612800 times
1-DAY : 0 to 154828800 times
PSAD-B
PSAD-U
Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW
Protection Switch Actual Duration USW
The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PSAC-
B and PSAC-U respectively.
15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds
1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds
PSC Protection Switch Count
The total number of PSAC-B and PSAC-U
15-MIN : 0 to 230400 times
1-DAY : 0 to 22118400 times
PSRC-B
PSRC-U
Protection Switch Request Count BSW
Protection Switch Request Count USW
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including PSAC-
B/U and invalid request due to persistence (BSW and USW
respectively).
15-MIN : 0 to 1612800 times
1-DAY : 0 to 154828800 times
PSRSAD-B
PSRSAD-U
Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW
Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration USW
The number of second which contains at least one occasion of
Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch operation
(BSW and USW respectively).
15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds
1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds
SRT 1F
5-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

5.2.4 Analog Monitor
Analog value of transmitter/receiver of MSTU can be displayed:
Status/Control
Analog Monitor
Display Current Level / History Level / Threshold Crossing Seconds
Threshold Level RL-1, RL-2 and TL can be set:
Provisioning
Facility
Set Radio Interface
Set Level Threshold
Tolerance: 3 dB between 35 65 dB
The following table shows Analog Monitor Types and the threshold level.
Display Monitor Types Description and Threshold Levels
Current Level RL-M Receive Level of Main Antenna
The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the Main antenna.
-15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD Receive Level of SD (Space Diversity) Antenna
The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the SD antenna.
-15 to -80 dBm
TL Transmit Level
The RF transmit level at the output of MSTU.
+11 to +35 dBm
History Level RL-M-MAX Receive Level of Main Antenna Maximum
The maximum receive level during the monitoring period.
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm
1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
RL-M-MIN Receive Level of Main Antenna Minimum
The minimum receive level during the monitoring period.
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm
1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD-MAX Receive Level of SD Antenna Maximum
The maximum receive level during the monitoring period.
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm
1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-23
Display Monitor Types Description and Threshold Levels
continued;--
History Level
RL-SD-MIN Receive Level of SD Antenna Minimum
The minimum receive level during the monitoring period.
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm
1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm

TL-MAX Transmitted Level Maximum
The maximum transmit level during the monitoring period.
+11 to +35 dBm
TL-MIN Transmitted Level Minimum
The minimum transmit level during the monitoring period.
+11 to +35 dBm
RLTS-M-1 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified
by RL-1
Threshold
Crossed
Seconds
RLTS-M-2 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified
by RL-2
RLTS-SD-1 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified
by RL-1
RLTS-SD-2 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified
by RL-2
TLTS Transmit Level Threshold crossed Seconds
15-MIN: 1 to 900 seconds (default = 900)
Threshold
Level Setting
RL-1 Receive Level Threshold 1
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm (default = -80 dBm)
RL-2 Receive Level Threshold 2
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm (default = -80 dBm)
TL Transmit Level Threshold
15-MIN: +11 to +35 dBm (default = +35 dBm)

SRT 1F
5-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.2.5 Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI)
The Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI) menu group is provided for
the testing and special maintenance of the MSTU radio section.
This menu group affects the channel traffic. Before executing any
control on this menu group, switch over the traffic to the protection
channel and change the Maintenance State of the channel to Remove.
Status/Control
Maintenance Radio Interface
Change Maintenance State (Carry out before following sub-menus)
Radio Physical Interface
RSPI Adjustment
Maintenance for SD
Maintenance for Co-CH
Dade Adjustment

Sub-Menu Item Description
Change Maint. State Remove Changes to Maint. State for following sub-menus.
Restore Changes to In Service State for normal operation.
Retrieve Displays the current status.
Radio Physical Interface Carrier Wave ON Stops modulation and send carrier wave.
Auto Gain Cont. Off Stops AGC of RX block for IF-IF characteristics
measurement.
Auto Level Cont.
Off
Stops ALC of TX block for IF-IF characteristics
measurement.
Frequency
Measurement
Executes AGC OFF, ALC OFF and EPS OFF at once
for IF-IF characteristics measurement.
RSPI Adjustment TXPWR Adjusts TX output power at ALC ON.
(Analog level adjustment) TXGAIN Adjusts TX output power at ALC OFF.
RXRFGAIN Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC
OFF
RXIFGAIN Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
SDGAIN Adjusts SD side gain to compensate difference
between Main and SD receiver.
SDSLOPE Adjusts SD side amplitude slope to compensate
difference between Main and SD receiver.
Maintenance for SD SD DADE ON Activate switcher function for SD DADE adjustment.
EPS OFF Stops Endless Phase Shifter (EPS).
Maintenance for Co-CH XPIC-OFF Stops Cross Polarization Interference Cancellor.
RXCLINT Select internal local oscillator reference clock by force.
Dade Adjustment DADEADJST Adjusts baseband DADE for hitless RPS (USW)
operation.
Display Maint. State Displays above items in maintenance position.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-25
5.3 Radio Protection Switch
Supervise/control of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) is carried out
through the LCT terminal.
Log on
The LCT must log on to the receive end of the direction to be
supervised/controlled. To control the reverse direction, log in to the
opposite station (NE).
To open the Radio Protection Switch (RPS) window:
Control/Status
Group 1
Group 2 (for 2
nd
RPS group if the system has)
To open the RPS window of the other NE, log on to the 2
nd
NE then
repeat the above process.
To display two windows simultaneously:
Window
Tile
Figure 5-4 shows the Radio Protection Switch window.
USW/BSW
The Unipolar Switch (USW) is operated Uni-directionally and in the
hitless mode for manual control and for most of the automatic switching.
The Bipolar Switch (BSW) is operated Bi-directionally and bears some
data error. However, the BSW provides more secure isolation for testing
and special maintenance work.

Figure 5-4 - Outline of Radio Protection Switch
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)
MSTU
(USW)

Main 1

Main 2

Main 3

Main 1

Main 2

Main 3
Prot Prot
To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal
To/from Main N
Unipolar signal
To/from Main N
Unipolar signal
SRT 1F
5-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

Lockout Inhibits any type of RPS operation (1
st
priority).
Force Forces the SW (2
nd
priority).
Manual Operates the SW manually (4
th
priority) .
ALARM Displays the AID = RPS alarm.
Display SW PM Data Displays PSAC, PSRC, PSAD and PSRSAD.
Clear SW PM Data Clears SW PM data above.
Sets SW Initiator Sets SW Initiator Enable/No.
Set Sys Parameter Sets Max. CH, Priority CH, WTR and OCC
Refresh Redraws the window to refresh the current condition.
Close Close the RPS window.
(1) Control Button
Help Displays Help.
BSW Selects the SW for control (Bi-directional). (2) SW Box
USW Selects the SW for control (Uni-directional).
in Green Normal (Released). (3) Manual Control
Indicator
in Red Controlled (Operated)
W1 to W7 Main 1 channel to Main 7 channel. (4) Channel No.
OCC Occasional traffic (option).
(5) W2 Switched CH No. indication.
This example shows Bi-directional auto switching by W2 unit failure.
Figure 5-5 - Radio Protection Switch window
Lockout
Help
Close
Refresh
Force
Manual
Alarm
Set Sys
Set SW Initiator
Clear SW PM
Display SW PM
B B
Force Manual
W7
W5
W6
W4
W3
W2
W1
W5
W6
W7
W4
W3
W2
W1
W2
OCC
B
Lockout
OCC
Lockout
B U
Manual Force
B U B U
BSW USW BSW USW
BSW USW BSW USW
BSW USW BSW USW
BSW USW BSW USW
Near End Far End
BSW USW BSW USW
BSW USW BSW USW
BSW USW BSW USW
BSW USW BSW USW
Normal : (black)
Fail : (red)
Legend :

(4)

(2)

(3)

(1)
(5)

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-27
5.3.1 Automatic Switching and Status Indication
Normal CH is shown as a black solid line
Failed CH is shown as a red dotted line
The switched channel No. is displayed on the line of Prot. CH (5).
A single arrow shows Uni-directional switching by USW.
A double arrow shows Bi-directional switching by BSW.
A red circled Manual Control Indicator (3) shows that the switch
element is operated for Lockout, Force or Manual switching.
Figure 5-5 shows the example that automatic Bi-directional switching of
W2 (Main 2) is due to unit failure.
In case of automatic switching, BSW operation caused by MSTU unit
failure has priority over USW operation.
Signal Failure (SF = Loss of Frame) has priority over Signal Degrade
(SD = BER ALM and 1bit error)
A priority channel shall be set to have priority over other channels, if the
switch initiator is at the same level.
5.3.2 Manual Control
The Radio Protection Switch (RPS) can be controlled manually through
the LCT terminal. The following are the functions and priority order of
the manual controls:
Control Priority Function
Lockout 1
st
Inhibits any type of RPS operation.
Force 2
nd
Switches the Main CH unless the specified Main
CH or Prot CH is locked out.
(Automatic) 3
rd
The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if
Prot CH is free and normal.
The CH switched by Manual or OCC control will be
chased out by automatic switching from Prot CH.
Manual 4
th
The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot
CH is free and normal.
OCC 5
th
Occasional traffic transmission (option)
The lowest priority traffic is allowed when Prot CH is
free and normal.
The OCC traffic gives way to any other RPS
command.

To operate manual control:
Click BSW or USW (2) of Near End, the SW box changes color
from green to red.
Click Control button (1) as required, then follow the instruction of
confirmation boxes.
The Manual Control Indicator (3) changes color from green to red.
SRT 1F
5-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.3.3 SW PM Data
Switch Performance Monitoring (SW PM) Data shows the stability of
radio propagation condition and RPS operation.
Following items will be displayed;--
PSAC-B
PSAC-U
Protection Switch Actual Count BSW / USW
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation.
PSAD-B
PSAD-U
Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW / USW
The number of second which contains at least one occasion
of PSAC-B / PSAC-U.
PSC Protection Switch Count
The total number of PSAC-B and PSAC-U
PSRC-B
PSRC-U
Protection Switch Request Count BSW / USW
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including
PSAC-B/U and invalid request due to WTR and persistence.
PSRSAD-B
PSRSAD-U
Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW /
USW
The number of second which contains at least one occasion
of Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch
operation.

5.3.4 Auto Refresh
To display the current status, click Refresh control button.
If wanting to maintain the RPS window to automatically display the latest
change, execute:
Status/Control
Auto Report Control
Allow Report
when you log on to the NE.
Allow Report is automatically canceled if logging out from the NE.
Note :
Auto Refresh function of RPS is subject to
Alarm/condition setting.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-29
5.3.5 Notice for RPS Operation
Operation of the Radio Protection System is very sensitive to traffic
transmission. Following notice should be observed.
5.3.5.1 Power off of SCSU
When turning off the power supply to SCSU, change the service state of
RPS to OOS (Out of Service) in advance. Otherwise, the traffic may be
briefly interrupted when turning on the power supply.
Provisioning
Service State
Change RPS State
Group 1 or Group 2
Delete
Then log off the LCT from the NE.
5.3.5.2 Lockout
WTR (Wait to Restore) also affects the LOCKOUT command also.
If WTR is 4 (minutes) or 20 (minutes), the LOCKOUT command will be
effective after the time delay specified by WTR.
If wanting to execute the LOCKOUT immediately, change WTR setting
to 0 as follows:
Provisioning
System
Set Radio Protection System
Set System Parameter
Wait to Restore
0 min
5.3.5.3 Power off of MSTU
To prevent disconnection, the traffic should be BSW manually switched
over to the Protection channel in advance.
Status/Control
Group 1 or Group 2
BSW of the channel to be switched off
Manual
Operate
Note:
BSW operation is not hitless and briefly interrupts traffic.
If the USW is operated on such occasion, the message indicating
USW operated will remain during the period that MSTU is power off.

SRT 1F
5-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.4 Maintenance Control of Other Functions
5.4.1 Loop Back
The Siemens SRT 1F is provided with the baseband loop back function.
LINE side : From Baseband input to Baseband output (Facility)
RADIO side: From DEM QAM module output to MOD QAM module input
(Terminal).
Without BBIU
For the standard configuration of SE interface, the loop back is carried
out at the MSTU unit.
With BBIU
For optional configuration of OPT interface and PE interface, loop back
is carried out at the OPT INTF unit and the PE INTF unit, respectively.
Loop Back test interrupts channel traffic. To safeguard traffic
transmission, Loop Back operation is monitored through the
Maintenance State .
Before carrying out Loop Back, Change Maintenance State to remove
the In Service state from the channel.
To carry out Loop Back test:
Control/Status
Loop Back
Change Maintenance State
Select the unit to be looped back
STM1MS LINE or
STM1MS RADIO
Remove (Restore is to release loopback)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-31

Figure 5-6 - Loop Back Operation

MOD TX
DEM RX

MOD TX
DEM RX

BSW

BSW
MSTU
LINE side RADIO side
LINE side RADIO side
BBIU MSTU
SRT 1F
5-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.4.2 Protection Switch Operation (MSP)
5.4.2.1 Multiplex Section Protection
In case of OPT INTF line protection, MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)
is provided. In addition to automatic switching, MSP can be operated
through the LCT either manually or inhibited from automatic switching.
To carry out MSP manual operation:
Control/Status of BBIU
Protection Switch
Operate Protection Switch
Select the channel to be operated
STM1MS LINE
MAN for manual switch or
FRCD for forced switch or
LOCKOUT to inhibit automatic switch
Priority Order of MSP is:
Lockout > Forced > Auto (Signal Failure) > Auto (Signal Degrade) >
Manual
5.4.2.2 TCU unit Protection
In case of TCU unit protection (two units of X and Y installed), the
manual switch over of the working TCU is available through the LCT.
To change the working TCU;--
Control/Status of SCSU
Protection Switch
Operate Protection Switch
Select the TCU to remove from working condition
EQPT
MAN for manual switch or
FRCD for forced switch or
LOCKOUT to inhibit automatic switch
5.4.2.3 Synch Switch
The synchronous source is automatically selected to the highest quality
level currently available.
The user can select the synchronous source manually, if necessary.
To change the synchronous source manually:
Control/Status of SCSU
Protection Switch
Operate Synch Switch
Select the TCU to change the synchronous source
EC for Equipment clock or
LC for Line clock
PRI 1/PRI 2/PRI 3/INT/HO
INT (Internal) and HO (Holdover) are not suitable for traffic
transmission.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-33
5.4.3 ALS Release
Laser emission of OPT INTF unit is automatically shutdown when the
fiber optic cable is disconnected for personnel safety. Then the OPT
INTF retransmits the output intermittently to recover the signal
transmission at a specific interval.
ALS Release is provided to restart the Laser emission through manual
control, in addition to normal restarting stated above.
MAN : Emits OPT INTF output for 2 seconds
TST : Emits OPT INTF output for 90 seconds
To operate ALS Release:
Control/Status of BBIU
ALS Release
Select the channel to be operated
Restart Mode
MAN for 2 seconds emission or
TST for 90 seconds emission.

SRT 1F
5-34 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.5 Unit Replacement

Warning
Most of the unit replacement operations affect on the traffic
transmission service.
The maintenance staff must inform these operations to the Central
Maintenance & Operation Center (CMOC) in advance.
5.5.1 Fan Replacement
An MSTU is equipped with 4 air cooling fans. These fans should be
replaced with spares when they are worn out. Table 5.6 shows the
relationship of FAN alarm and equipment condition.
When FAN alarm is detected, all 4 fans should be replaced with
spares at once.
Table 5.6 - FAN Alarm and Equipment Condition
Number of Fan Equipment
Working Out Alarm Condition of MSTU
4 0 No alarm Normal operation
3 1 FAN Alarm Normal operation
2 2 FAN Alarm TX output power is 10 dB down
1 3 UNIT Failure Power supply off to MSTU.
BSW operates

How to replace FANs
1. Turn the rotary switch on MSTU to [ F ] to switch TX output to LOW
level and inhibit Fan alarm. See Figure 5-7.
2. Pull out the FAN PWR cable.
3. Remove the FAN assembly. See Figure 5-7.
4. Mount a new FAN assembly and re-connect the FAN PWR cable
securely.
5. Turn back the rotary switch on MSTU to [ 0 ]
6. Check alarm/status indications on LEDs and LCT.
7. If normal, switch back the traffic from the protection channel.

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-35

Figure 5-7 - Replacement of FAN Assembly

The FAN Assembly is mounted on to the MSTU by
4 long screws to and
4 short screws to .
Turn to [ F ] to switch TX
output to LOW level and
inhibit Fan alarm
SRT 1F
5-36 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.5.2 MSTU and Other Units
MSTU
To replace an MSTU, the traffic should be switched over to the
protection channel by forcing the BSW in advance, and by cutting off
power to the unit. The BSW operation momentarily interrupts traffic.
OPT INTF and PE INTF
The traffic cannot be protected during the replacement work, unless the
line (facility) is protected by MSP (for OPT INTF - X/Y only).
The maintenance staff must carefully organize unit replacement in order
to reduce traffic disconnection period.
Units in SCSU
Replacement of any unit other than that listed below may seriously
affect traffic:
TCU in stand-by (in case of card protection of TCU-X/Y).
HK unit.

System Setting Data
System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU.
When a unit is replaced with spares, the system setting data will be
automatically transferred from the SV unit. There is no setting change
after unit replacement.
After unit replacement:
Turn on power supply and wait at least 10 minutes to complete the
system setting data download.
Check LED indication on SRT 1F equipment.
Check Alarm/status indication of Status/Control menu on the LCT.
Check Analog Monitoring of Status/Control menu on the LCT.
Check the applicable system setting of Provisioning menu on the
LCT.
Check that Service State is In Service of Provisioning menu on the
LCT.
Leave equipment for stability check at least 30 minutes.
Check Error Performance history by Display PM of Status/Control
menu on the LCT.
Compare the above data with other channels.
Minimize setting change and re-adjustment of the replaced unit
unless performance does not meet the long term specification. If
setting change and re-adjustment is required, follow the instructions
stated in par. Acceptance and Turn up of this manual.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-37
5.5.3 SV unit Replacement
System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU.
The data is stored in the Inner Memory on the main PCB and also in the
Back-up Memory on the sub-unit.
To replace the SV unit with a spare:
Check that the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch
operation).
Change the Service State of RPS from In Service (IS) to Out of
Service (OOS).
Provisioning
Service State
Change RPS State
Group 1 or Group 2
Delete
Log off the LCT from the NE.
Wait until when BACK UP LED of SV unit turns off
(approx. 4 minutes)
Cut off power supply to the SCSU and remove the SV unit.
Remove the Back-up Memory sub-unit form the SV main PCB.
Fit the Back-up Memory sub-unit on to the spare SV.
Mount the spare SV on to the SCSU and turn on power supply to the
SCSU.
Wait until when ACS/SWDL LED of SV unit turns off
(approx. 5 minutes)
Log on the LCT to the NE.
Check LED indications SRT 1F equipment and Alarm/status
conditions on the LCT.
Change the Service State of RPS from Out of Service (OOS) to In
Service (IS).
Provisioning
Service State
Change RPS State
Group 1 or Group 2
Enter
SRT 1F
5-38 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Check the RPS operations. If traffic interruption is not possible,
check Manual operation of USW. If the failure of SV unit is extended
to the RPS total operation, check all related functions.
Figure 5-8 shows the PCB of SV unit.
WARNING
Do not cut off power supply to the SCSU unit
when BACK UP LED is glowing,
otherwise the system setting data may be damaged seriously.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-39

Figure 5-8 - PCB of SV unit
Caution --
This unit contains devices that may be damaged by electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
Observe all precautions relating to the safe handling of ESD sensitive
equipment.
Front
side
Connector
side

VF/DGTL sub-unit

VF/DGTL sub-unit

Backup
Memory
Screw
Screw
SRT 1F
5-40 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.5.4 Returning Replaced Unit
Units for SRT 1F equipment are manufactured based on high density
assembling and require special tools, jigs and measurement equipment
for repair. Faulty unit should be returned to the manufacturer for repair
For quick and adequate repair work, the following information must be
stated on the unit.
Unit name
Serial No.
Station name
Facing station name
Frequency band
Channel No.
System configuration
Date and time alarm/abnormality detected
Date and time the unit replaced
Detailed description of alarm/abnormality
Alarm/status log of the local station and associated stations
Error performance log of the local station and associated stations
Detailed description after unit replacement

The user can use its own report form.
Table 5.7 shows an example of Faulty Unit Report

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-41
Table 5.7 - Faulty Unit Report (example)
FAULTY UNIT REPORT
Unit Name Serial No.
Station Name Facing Station
Freq. Band CH No. (TX
Freq.)

System Configuration
No. of Main CHs Prot CH Yes No
Operation Sys Alternated
Co-channel
BB Interface SE INTF
OPT INTF with MSP
OPT INTF w/o MSP
PE INTF
TCU with Stand-by
without Stand-by
If you are returning an MSTU, please fill the below;--
TX output level (specification) =
dBm,
SD = Yes No
Modulation Sys = 64QAM 128QAM
Date/time Alarm detected (mm/dd/yy.
hh:mm)

Date/time Unit replaced (mm/dd/yy.
hh:mm)

Details of alarm/status and other conditions of before unit replacement

Details of alarm/status and other conditions of after unit replacement

Other comments if any

Compiled by Date (mm/dd/yy)
Checked by Date (mm/dd/yy)
Approved by Date (mm/dd/yy)
SRT 1F
5-42 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
5.6 APPENDIX
5.6.1 LCT Command Tree and Functions
The following table shows the Command tree of LCT (Local Terminal)
and related functions.
1 File
1.1 Logfile
1.1.1 PC Message Log All Displays the logged history of Personal Computer
1.1.2 NE Commands Log Displays the logged history of NE commands
1.1.3 Transaction Log Displays the logged history of Transaction message

1.2 Preference All Sets Alarm retrieve*, Alarm beep, Access mode, Auto
time out
* Alarm retrieve = mother option for Auto Report
Control
1.3 Exit All Exits from the LCT application and close the LCT initial
screen

2 Session *
2.1 Log on All Logs on to NEs
2.2* Comm Setup (before log on)
2.2.1* Port Setup * Sets Port No., Baud rate, Data bits, Stop bits, Parity
2.2.2* Modem Setup * Sets Modem type, Dial prefix/suffix, Hangup prefix/suffix,
Originate Seq. for connection via Modem
2.2.3* Modem Dial * Establishes communication via Modem
2.2.4* Modem Hang-up * Abandons Modem dial
2.2.5* PAD Dial * Establishes communication via PAD
2.2.6* PAD Hang-up * Abandons PAD dial

2.3 Log off All Logs off from NEs
2.4 Re-configure Screen All Redraws the shelf picture to reflect configuration change
2.5 ASCII Terminal All Opens Hyper Terminal to access to NE

3 TL1
3.1 TL1 Command All Creates and sends TL1 commands

SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-43

4 Provisioning

4.1 Service State Changes Primary service state IS (In Service) and
OOS (Out of Service)
Enter = Changes from OOS to IS
Delete = Changes from IS to OOS
Retrieve = Displays current service state
4.1.1 Change EQPT State BBIU Service state of BB INTF unit
4.1.2 Change Facility State BBIU Service state of STM1RS facility
4.1.3 Change RPS State All Service state of Radio Protection System
a Group 1 All Service state of RPS Group 1
b Group 2 All Service state of RPS Group 2

4.2 Facility
4.2.1 Set Baseband Interface All
a Set OHB BBIU
(MSTU)
Usage of RSOH and MSOH
STM1RS = J0, E1, D1 to D3, B1
STM1MS = MS AIS, MS FERF, E2, D4 to D12
SSBIT, B2, K1K2, Z1,Z2
b Set Facility Threshold BBIU Threshold level of error performance
STM1RS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS
STM1MS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES,
AU4 = PJS
c Set Facility Group BBIU Excessive Error initiator
Signal Fail/Signal Degrade
Signal Degrade Threshold = 1E-5 to 1E-9
d Set Alarm Attribute Alarm severity and SA/NSA of following items
4.2.1d
MSTU
Set Alarm Attribute MSTU EQPT = CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-CM/NC,
RCI, FAN-FAIL, XPIC-OFF, DEM-FLR, MOD-FLR,
ACTCW, RX-FLR, ACTEPSOFF, ACTSDDADE,
ACTAGCOFF, FMSR, RXLCINT, TCA-RLTS,
TX-FLR, ACTALCOFF, TCA-TLTS, PSFAIL
RSPI = DEM-LOS, LOF, UAS-RP, SUE-RP, TUE-RP,
TCA-RP, TCA-OFS, FADE-ALM, RADRM, RP-
ERR, MOD-LOS, RX-LOS, SD-RCV-DN, TX-
LOS
WS = LOS
CNCT = XPIC-LOS, 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS, PIN-LOS
SRT 1F
5-44 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
4.2.1d
BBIU
Set Alarm Attribute BBIU EQPT = OPOR, OPD, LBOL, CARD-FAIL, RMVD,
MIMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, ACTALS, ALSTST,
ALSMAN, PSFAIL
STM1RS = SUE-B1, TUE-B1, TCA-B1, TCA-OFS,
LOS, STIM, UAS-B1
STM1MS = FERF, SUE-B2, TUE-B2, TCA-B2, UAS-
FEBE, SUE-FEBE, TUE-FEBE, TCA-FEBE,
SSMBCHG, LOOPBACK, CSESP, FESP, TESP,
FSEP, TSEP, AIS
AU4 = LOP, AIS, TCA-PJS
UC = LOS
CNCT = 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS
4.2.1d
SCSU
Set Alarm Attribute SCSU SV = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, LOG-THC, TLOG-THC,
SUBUNIT-FAIL, RCI). RUC (LOS). RSC (LOF).
DCC (DCC-FAIL). RPS (PRCM). COM
(ACTACO). CNCT (SINT-FAIL)
ECU1,2 = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-
CM/NC, RCI). DCC (DCC-FAIL)
HK1,2 = EQPT (same as ECU1,2)
TCU = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-
CM/NC, WKSWP, RCI, MANSW, FRCDSW,
FRZSW, PSFAIL). CLKBIT (LOS-2MB, AIS, FAL).
CLKHZ (LOS-2MH). SYNC (SWTOHO,
SWTOINT, HOLDOVER, INTERNAL, MANSW,
EXTCLK-CUTOFF, QUALITY-DOWN, SYNSW
PRI1/2/3)
4.2.1e Set Trace BBIU
e1 Set OHB BBIU J0 Byte (N/STMID/TRC) for Trace
e2 Set Trace Value BBIU Expect Trace, Sending Trace, MIS-STI Alarm OFF
f Set Signal Label BBIU
f1 Set OHB BBIU Usage of SOH for signal label
f2 Set SLB Value BBIU Signal label value
4.2.2 Set Radio Interface MSTU
a Set RSPI MSTU Recovery (and Generation) of BERALM, Route ID,
SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)
b Set Radio Channel MSTU Frequency CH, Local Clock Master/Slave, Inhibit
MOD/DEM function
c Set Facility Threshold MSTU SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS
d Set Level Threshold MSTU RL-1, RL-2, TL (dBm)
e Set Auto Transmit
Control
MSTU ATPC Mode (LOW/HIGH/AUTO)
ATPC Initiator Level (dBm)
f Set RSC All X(Prot)/Y(Main), DSC SEL (P/W1 to 7)
4.2.3 Set Way side traffic MSTU SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)
4.2.4 Set User Channel BBIU 64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA)
4.2.5 Set Radio User Channel All RUCVFT(dBr), RUCVFR(dBr),
64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-45
4.3 System
4.3.1 Set NE ID All NE ID = TID = System ID
4.3.2 Set Date and Time All Current date and time
4.3.3 Set System Configuration All System Type, RF Type, FRQ Arrangement, Space
Diversity, Line Interface, BBIU Use, Group1 Max CH,
Group2 Max CH, Group 1 RPS (Y/N), Group 2 RPS
(Y/N)
4.3.4 Set Optional Unit
Configuration
All ECU (Y/N), HK unit (Y/N), TCU Protection
4.3.5 Set Interface Configuration All Sets BB INTF configuration
N/OPTL1/OPTL2/OPTL3
4.3.6 Set PM Time All Standard time for Performance Monitor start
4.3.7 Set Housekeeping Alarm SCSU Alarm Severity, Alarm Type, Alarm Message
4.3.8 Set Ext. Control Name SCSU Control Type
4.3.9 Set Alarm Delay All ALM ACT Time (0/2.5/10), ALM DACT Time (0/16)
4.3.10 Set Synchronization All
a Set Synch Mode All Synch Mode =
b Set Synch Parameter All CLK MODE (TCU/THROUGH), EC Priority (1/2), LC
Priority (1/2/3), Ext 2Mhz, Ext 2Mb/s, EC output 2Mbit
EC Threshold, LC Threshold, Error Free (Y/N)
4.3.11 Set Radio Protection Sys
a Set System Parameter All Maximum CH, Priority CH, Wait to Restore, OCC Use
b Set SW Initiator All SW Initiator (Y/N)
4.3.12 Set MSP BBIU Lock in Function, Switching Count, Monitor Time, Hold
Time, Direction, Persist Check Time, Uni/Bi Code
Mask, MSP Mode Setting
4.3.13 Set ALS BBIU ALS Function (Y/N), Release Time
4.3.14 Set Equipment Inventory All Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No. NE-Type, Resource
Status, Eqpt-Note
4.3.15 Set LBK Release Time Loopback RLS Time (hour)
4.3.16 Set Orderwire
a Set OHB BBIU E1 (Y/N), E2 (Y/N)
b Channel Select All E1/2 (N/GP-W1/ GP-W2/....)
c OW Function All OW Function (Y/N), Group Address, Station Address,
LED, Buzzer, Relay, Ringer
d OW Extension All OW Extension E1/2, OW VF TX/RX (-dBr)
4.3.17 Set LED Mode All Mode 1 (Normal = yellow) / Mode 2 (Normal = green)
SRT 1F
5-46 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

4.4 Section DCC
4.4.1 SDCC Service State All In service/Out of Service
4.4.2 LAPD Parameter All Window Size, Frame Timeout, Inact Timeout, Retries,
Frame Size, LAPD Cmd/Rsp, LAPD Data Link
4.4.3 Set 2
nd
DCC All 2
nd
DCC CH selection

4.5 OSS Interface
4.5.1 OSSI type & Service State All X25/OSI/Back to Back, IS/OOS
4.5.2 LAPB Parameter All Type, Window Size, Retry Timer, Packet Size,
Retransmit
4.5.3 X25 Parameter All X25 Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation,
Restart Timer, Request Timeout, Reset Timeout, Clear
Timeout, Closed User ID, Channel-Lower, Channel-
Upper
4.5.4 VC Parameter All PVC = Group No. CH NO. Peer Address
SVC = Peer Address, Packet Size, Window Size,
Confirmation, Ntwk User ID
4.6 Network Layer Protocol
4.6.1 NLP Parameter All NLP Type (IS1/IS1 IS2/ES), Area Address, System ID
4.6.2 NLP Manual Adjacency All NLP Type (SVC/PVC), Area Address, System ID
4.6.3 NLP Address Prefix All NLP Type (SVC), Area Prefix
4.6.4 NLP Manual Area Address All Manual Area Address
4.6.5 Display NLP Manual Area
Address
All Scope (LCL/NTWK)
4.6.6 NLP Intermediate Sys1 All Max Area
4.6.7 NLP Intermediate Sys2 All Reachable Area Address
4.7 TARP Control TID Address Resolution Protocol Control
4.7.1 TARP Parameters All TARP Type, Response Time
4.7.2 TARP Manual Adjacency All Adjacency NTWK Address, Destination NTWK
Address, NPL Type
4.7.3 Display TARP Manual
Adjacency
All Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address
4.7.4 Display TARP Cache All Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address, TID
List
4.7.5 Operate TARP Echo All Destination TID, System ID, NTWK Address, Request
Working Address, Retries, Response Timer, TID List
4.8 LAN Parameters All TARP Packet, Packet Size, LAN SAP, Service State
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-47

5 Status/Control

5.1 Shelf Condition
5.1.1 Display Log files All AID, AID Type, Alarm Severity, Condition Type,
Service Effect, Monitor Value, Threshold Level,
Location, Direction, Occurred Time, Cleared
Time, Condition Description
5.1.2 Display All Log files All Same as Display Log Files
5.1.3 Clear Log files All Clears Log files
5.1.4 Display Maintenance
List
All AID, AID Type, Alarm Severity, Condition Type

5.2 Radio Protection Switch
5.2.1 Group 1 All Lockout, Force, Manual, Alarm, Display SW PM
Data, Clear SW PM Data, Set SW Initiator, Set
System Parameter
5.2.2 Group 2 All Same as Group 1

5.3 Service State
5.3.1 Display Eqpt OOS List All Displays Equipment in Out of Service condition
5.3.2 Display Facility OOS
List
All Displays Facilities in Out of Service condition

5.4 Performance Monitor
5.4.1. Display PM Data MSTU RSPI = BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OFS, BBER, ESR,
SESR
BBIU STM1RS/STM1MS = BBE, ES, SES,UAS,OFS,
BBER, ESR, SESR
AU4 = PJCH, PJCL, PJCS
5.4.2 Clear PM Data All Deletes Logged PM Data of selected facility
5.4.3 Clear PM Data ALL All Deletes Logged PM Data all

5.5 Analog Monitor
5.5.1 Display Current Level MSTU RL-M, RL-SD, TL
5.5.2 Display History Level MSTU TL-MAX, TL-MIN, RL-M/SD-MIN/MAX
5.5.3 Display TC Second MSTU TLTS (15M/24H), RLTS-M/SD-1/2 (15M/24H)
5.5.4 Clear History Data MSTU
SRT 1F
5-48 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

5.6 Display CSES Log MSTU
BBIU
Displays 15 minute data
5.7 Housekeeping Alarm SCSU Retrieve
5.8 External Control SCSU Operate/Release
5.9 Change Maint State MSTU
BBIU
Remove = Changes from IS to Maintenance
Restore = Changes from Maintenance to IS
Retrieve = Displays current status
5.10 Trace BBIU MIS-STI Alarm OFF, Expect Trace, Sending
Trace, Incoming Trace
5.11 Signal Label BBIU Displays Signal Label
5.12 Alarm Cut Off All Disables audible alarm extension

5.13 Loop Back
5.13.1 Change Maint State BBIU
(MSTU)
STM1MS LINE/RADIO =
Remove/Restore/Retrieve
5.13.2 Operate Loopback BBIU
(MSTU)
STM1MS LINE/RADIO = Operate/Release
5.13.3 Display Loopback State All Displays facilities in Loopback

5.14 Protection Switch
BBIU STM1MS LINE = MAN/FRCD/LOCKOUT for
MSP
5.14.1 Operate Protection SW
SCSU EQPT = MAN/FRCD/LOCKOUT for TCU X/Y
5.14.2 Operate Synch SW All EC/LC = PR1/2/3, INT, HO
5.14.3 Display Prot SW State All Displays Protection switches operated

5.15 Maintenance Radio
Interface

5.15.1 Change Maint State MSTU RSPI = Remove/Restore/Retrieve
5.15.2 Radio Physical Interface MSTU Carrier Wave ON, Auto Gain Control Off, Auto
Level Control Off, Frequency Measurement
5.15.3 RSPI Adjustment MSTU TXPWR, TXGAIN, RXRFGAIN, RXIFGAIN,
SDGAIN, SDSLOPE
5.15.4 Maintenance for SD MSTU SD DADE OFF, EPS OFF
5.15.5 Maintenance for Co-CH MSTU XPIC-OFF, RXCLINT
5.15.6 Dade Adjustment MSTU DADEADJST
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003 5-49
5.15.7 Display Maint State All Displays Controls in maintenance position

5.16 Physical Inventory
5.16.1 Display Equipment
Inventory
All AID, Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No, NE-Type,
Resource-Status, Eqpt-Status, NE-Manual-Code,
NE-Product-Code, NE-Serial-No, NE-ACPT-Date,
NE-WARR-END-Date
5.16.2 Display Unit Inventory All AID, SIU-Type, SIU-BLD-HW, SIU-MANU-Code,
SIU-Serial-No, SIU-Barcode, SIU-ACPT-Date,
SIU-WARR-END Date, SIU-BLD-STT

5.17 ALS Release BBIU Restart Mode = MAN/TST
5.18 RCI Control All Remote Card Identifier = Operate/Release

5.19 Auto Report Control
5.19.1 Allow Alarm Report All Allows automatic report of Alarm message
5.19.2 Inhibit Alarm Report All Inhibits automatic report of Alarm message
5.19.3 Allow PM Report All Allows automatic report of PM data (every 15M)
5.19.4 Inhibit PM Report All Inhibits automatic report of PM data
5.19.5 Allow LED Report All Allows automatic report of LED indication on Unit
picture
5.19.6 Inhibit LED Report All Inhibits automatic report of LED indication
5.19.7 Allow Report All Validates Allow Alarm Report and Allow LED
Report
Allow Report is canceled when the user logged
of.
5.19.8 PM Report Control
a Periodical Report All Report Function [ STD ] = Y/N
b No data Report All Report Function [NONDAT] = Y/N
c Analog data Report MSTU Report Function [ LVL ] = Y/N

5.20 Transaction Log All
5.20.1 Display Transaction Log All
5.20.1 Clear Transaction Log All

SRT 1F
5-50 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

6 Administration
6.1 Add User All Adds and defines a new LCT user for the NE
6.2 Delete User All Deletes a LCT user from the NE
6.3 Change User All Changes privilege of a user
6.4 Change Logged User
Password
All Changes the password of user now logged on to
the NE
6.5 Show User List All Shows the user list registered for the NE
6.6 Show Logged User
Privilege
All Shows privilege of the user now logged on to the
NE

7 Window
7.1 Cascade All Controls the stile of screen display
7.2 Tile Horizontal All
7.3 Tile Vertical All
7.4 Arrange Icons All
7.5 Tool Bar All Shows/hides Tool Bar of the LCT screen
7.6 Status Bar All Shows/hides Status Bar at the bottom of LCT
screen
7.7 Global View All Shows/hides Global View window
7.8 Output All Shows/hides Command message lines at the
bottom of LCT screen

8 Help
8.1 Help All Shows the general help of LCT application
8.2 About LCT All Shows the version of LCT application.

A APPENDIX
A.1 Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms
Table A.1- Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms
Abbreviation Description
A
A/D Analog to Digital converter
ACO Alarm Cut Off
ACTAGC Act Automatic Gain Control of Receiver
ACTALS Act Automatic Laser Shut down
ACTCW Act Carrier Wave mode
ADD Address
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AID Access Identification
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
AIS REC Alarm Indication Signal Receiving
ALC Automatic Level Control
ALM Alarm
ALSMAN Automatic Laser Shut down released by Manual restart
ALSTST Automatic Laser Shut down released by Test restart
AMP Amplifier
ANS Answer
ANT Antenna
APS Automatic Protection Switch
ASCII American Standard Cord for Information Interchange
ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control
ATT Attenuator
AU 4 Administrative Unit 4
AUD NE ALM Audible Network Element Alarm

A. APPENDIX UMN
SRT 1F
2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued)
B
B/S Bit per Second
BAL Balance
BB Base Band signal
BBC Base Band Control
BBE Background Block Error
BBIU Base Band Interface Unit
BEF Band Eliminate Filter
BER Bit Error Ratio
BIP Bit Interleave Parity check
BPF Band Pass Filter
BR NTWK Branching Network(Radio frequency band)
BRU Branching Network Unit
BSI Bit Sequence Independence
BSW Bipolar Switch
BWB Back Wired Board
C
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio
CIR Circulator
CK Clock
CLK Clock
CMB Channel management Bus
CMI Code Mark Inversion
CN Connector
CNCT Connect
CODIRE Co-directional interface
CONTRA Contra-directional interface
CPU Central Processor Unit
CR Critical Alarm
CSESP Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Occurred

D
D/A Digital to Analog converter
DADE Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer
DCC Digital Communication Channel
DEF Decision Feedback
DEM Demodulator
DI Data Input
DMM Digital Multi-Meter
DO Data Output
DSC Digital Service Channel
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
DUP Duplexer
E
EC Equipment Clock
ECU Embedded Channel Unit/ Embedded Communication Unit/
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Endless Phase Shifter
EQL Equalizer
ES Errored Second
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
F
F LOSS Frame Loss
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction
FEFR Far End Receive Failure
FESP Fifteen minute Error Seconds Performance
FET Field Effect Transistor
FG Frame Ground
FIL Filter
FLR Failure
FMSR Frequency Measurement
FRCDSW Switch is in Forced Switching mode

A. APPENDIX UMN
SRT 1F
4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
G
G Ground
GAAS Gallium Arsenide
GNE Gateway Network Element
GUI Graphical User Interface
GP1 Group 1
GP2 Group 2
H
H Horizontal
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3
HEMT High Electron Mobility Transistor
HK Housekeeping
HL Higher Layer
HL CPU Higher Layer Central Processor Unit
HPA High Power Amplifier
HYB Hybrid circuit
I
ICH In-phase Channel
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
INI Initiator
INTF Interface
IS In Service
ITU International Telecommunication Union

L
LAPD Link Application Procedure D channel
LBOL Laser Bias current is too High.
LC Line Clock
L6G Lower 6 GHz band
LED Light Emitting Diode
LL CPU Lower Layer Central Processor Unit
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
LO Local
LO MON Local Monitor
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOP Loss Of Pointer
LOS Loss Of Signal
LPF Low Pass Filter
LSI Large Scale Integrated circuit
LTE Line Terminal Equipment
LVL Level

A. APPENDIX UMN
SRT 1F
6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
M
MAINT Maintenance
MANSW Manual Switch
MC Maintenance Center
MID Minimum Dispersion combiner
MISC Miscellaneous
MIX Mixer
MJ Major alarm
MLCM Multi Level Code Modulation
MN Minor alarm
MN ANT Main Antenna
MOD Modulator
MPU Micro-Processor Unit
MS Multiplex Section
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSTU Main Signal Transmission Unit
MUX Multiplexer
N
NA Not Applicable
NC Not Connection
NE Network Element
NEND Near END
NFB No Fuse Breaker
NLP Network Layer Protocol
NMS Network Management System
NORM Normal
NSA Non Service Affect
NWC Network Center

O
OCC Occasional
OFS Out of Frame Second
OOS Out Of Service
OP AMP Operational Amplifier
OPD Degradation in Optical Power transmitted
OPOR Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range.
OPT Optical
OS Operation Software
OSC Oscillator
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSSI Operation Support System Interface
OW TEL Orderwire Telephone
P
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCM Pulse Code Multiplex
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PI Photo coupler Interface
PJCH Pointer Justification Count High
PJCL Pointer Justification Count Low
PJCS Pointer Justification Count SEcond
PLL Phase Lock Loop
PLO Phase Lock Loop controlled Oscillator
PM Performance Monitor
PM DATA Performance Monitor Data
PPM Percent Per Million
PSC Protection Switching Second
PSFAIL Power Supply Failure
PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit
PWR Power

A. APPENDIX UMN
SRT 1F
8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Q
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QCH Quadrature Channel
R
R CLK Receive Clock
RAB Rack Alarm Bus
RADRM Radio Route ID Mismatch
RAM Random Access Memory
RCI Remote Card Identification
RCK Receive Clock
RCLK Receive Clock
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
RCI Remote Card Identifier
RCV Receive
RD Receive Data
RDP Receiver Data Processing
RF Radio Frequency
RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Over Head byte
RL Relay
RL-1 Receiving Level-1
RL-2 Receiving Level-2
RL-M Receiving Level of Main receiver
RL-SD Receiving Level of SD receiver
RLTS Received Level Threshold Second
RMVD Required unit is missing
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RRF Receiver Radio Frequency section
RS Regenerative Section
RSL Receive Signal Level
RST Reset
RUC Radio service Channel
RX Receiver
RX-LOS Loss of Signal in RX
RXLCINT RX Local Internal Clock

S
S CLK Send Clock
SA Service Affect
SC Service Channel
SCSU Switching Control, Supervision Unit
SD Space Diversity
SD-RCV-DN SD Receiver Down
SDH Synchronous Digital hierarchy
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SES Severely Errored Second
SEV Severely Errored Threshold
SG Signal Ground
SIU Slide In Unit
SLP EQL Slope Equalizer
SR Shift Register
SS BIT Synchronous State Bit
SSMB Synchronous State Message Byte
SSU Synchronous Source Unit
STD Standard
STM-1 Synchronous Transfer Module level 1
SUE-RP Unavailable State Entered (RP)
SV Supervision/Supervisory
SVC Switched Virtual Circuit
SW Switch
SWDL Software Down Load
SWTOHO Synchronization reference is in Holdover state
SWTOINT Internal source signal is used for Synchronization
SYNC Synchronization
SYNSW Synchronization Switch

A. APPENDIX UMN
SRT 1F
10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
Abbreviation Abbreviation
T
TARP TID Address Resolution Protocol
TCA-OFS Threshold Crossing Alert-
TCA-RLTS Threshold Crossing Alert- RX Level Threshold
TCA-RP Threshold Crossing Alert-
TCA-TLTS Threshold Crossing Alert-TX Level Threshold
TCK Transmit Clock
TCLK Transmit Clock
TCU Timing Control Unit
TD Transmit Data
TD N Transmit Data Negative
TD P Transmit Data Positive
TDP Transmitter Data Processing
TEL Telephone
TESP Twenty four Hour Error Seconds
TID Target Identification
TIF Transmitter IF section
TL Transmitter output Level
TL 1 Transaction Language 1
TLTS Transmitted output Level Threshold Second
TRF Transmitter RF section
TVE Transversal Equalizer
TX Transmitter
TX-FLR Transmitter Failure
U
U6G Upper 6 GHz
U8G Upper 8 GHz
UAS Un-available Second / Un-available State
UC Users service Channel
UCH Users service Channel
UL User Level Layer
USW Unipolar Switch
UAF Un-Availability Filter

V
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VF Voice Frequency
VIS NE ALM Visual Network Element Alarm
W
WKSWP Working unit Switched to Protection
WR Warning
WS Wayside Signal
WTR Wait To Restore
X
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller

A. APPENDIX UMN
SRT 1F
12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

657 )

Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications

User Manual (UMN)

911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
SRT 1F

Synchronous Radio for Trunk
Applications

User Manual (UMN)

911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
SRT 1F
Applications

User Manual (UMN)
911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003
SRT 1F
Applications

User Manual (UMN)

911-362/02C0000 Issue 2, January 2003

User Manual: SRT 1F Synchronous Radio For Trunk Applications UMN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual: SRT 1F Synchronous Radio For Trunk Applications UMN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

MAIN (V) SD (V)

MAIN (V) SD (V)

UMN 5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

You might also like